process control system pcs 7, technological blocks · pdf filecontents process control system...

Contents

General information on the blockdescription 1General information on thefaceplates 2

Measurement and control 3

Motor and valve 4

Other technological blocks 5

Conversion blocks 6

Operator control blocks 7

Message blocks 8

Blocks for Batch Flexible 9

Appendix

Technical data AGlossary, Index

SIMATIC

Process Control System PCS 7Technological Blocks

Reference Manual

Edition 08/2001A5E00127672-01

23.08.2001

Copyright © Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or itscontents is not permitted without express written authority.Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rightscreated by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,are reserved.

Siemens AGBereich Automatisierungs- und AntriebstechnikGeschaeftsgebiet Industrie-AutomatisierungssystemePostfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg

Disclaimer of Liability

We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement withthe hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot beprecluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However,the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessarycorrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions forimprovement are welcomed.

©Siemens AG 2001Technical data subject to change.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00127672

Safety Guidelines

This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and

connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and

graded according to severity by the following texts:

! Dangerindicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if properprecautions are not taken.

! Warningindicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if properprecautions are not taken.

! Cautionindicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Cautionindicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Noticedraws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to aparticular part of the documentation.

Qualified Personnel

Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are

defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and

systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Correct Usage

Note the following:

! WarningThis device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the

technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers

which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.

This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installedcorrectly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

Trademarks

SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI® and SIMATIC NET® are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.

Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might

infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

23.08.2001

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksA5E00127672-01 iii

Contents

1 General information on the block description

2 General information on the faceplates

3 Measurement and control

3.1 CTRL_PID: PID controller block .......................................................................3-13.1.1 Description of CTRL_PID..................................................................................3-13.1.2 Signal processing in the setpoint and process-variable branches

of CTRL_PID.....................................................................................................3-33.1.3 Creation of the manipulated variable of CTRL_PID..........................................3-53.1.4 Manual, automatic and follow-up operation of CTRL_PID................................3-63.1.5 Changing operating modes in CTRL_PID.........................................................3-73.1.6 Error handling in CTRL_PID ...........................................................................3-103.1.7 Start-up, time and message characteristics of CTRL_PID .............................3-103.1.8 Block diagram of CTRL_PID...........................................................................3-123.1.9 Connections of CTRL_PID..............................................................................3-143.1.10 Operator control and monitoring of CTRL_PID...............................................3-203.2 CTRL_S: PID Step controller block.................................................................3-243.2.1 Description of CTRL_S ...................................................................................3-243.2.2 Signal processing in the setpoint and process-variable branches

of CTRL_S.......................................................................................................3-263.2.3 Actuating signal generation of CTRL_S..........................................................3-283.2.4 Manual, automatic and tracking operation of CTRL_S ...................................3-303.2.5 Changing operating modes in CTRL_S ..........................................................3-333.2.6 Error handling in CTRL_S...............................................................................3-363.2.7 Operating, monitoring and starting up CTRL_S..............................................3-373.2.8 Start-up, time and message characteristics of CTRL_S.................................3-373.2.9 Block diagram of CTRL_S...............................................................................3-393.2.10 Connections of CTRL_S .................................................................................3-423.2.11 Operator control and monitoring of CTRL_S ..................................................3-483.3 DIG_MON: Digital value monitoring................................................................3-543.3.1 Description of DIG_MON ................................................................................3-543.3.2 Connections of DIG_MON ..............................................................................3-563.3.3 Operator control and monitoring of DIG_MON ...............................................3-583.4 MEAS_MON: Measured value monitoring ......................................................3-593.4.1 Description of MEAS_MON.............................................................................3-593.4.2 Connections of MEAS_MON...........................................................................3-613.4.3 Operator control and monitoring of MEAS_MON............................................3-63

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological Blocksiv A5E00127672-01

3.5 RATIO_P: Ratio control...................................................................................3-653.5.1 Description of RATIO_P..................................................................................3-653.5.2 Connections of RATIO_P................................................................................3-663.5.3 Operator control and monitoring of RATIO_P.................................................3-683.6 FMCS_PID: Controller block ...........................................................................3-703.6.1 Description of FMCS_PID ...............................................................................3-703.6.2 Addressing ......................................................................................................3-723.6.3 Function...........................................................................................................3-723.6.4 Setpoint, limit, error signal and manipulated variable generation ...................3-733.6.5 Manual, automatic and tracking mode ............................................................3-753.6.6 Operating mode selection ...............................................................................3-753.6.7 Safety operation ..............................................................................................3-763.6.8 Transferring parameters to the module...........................................................3-763.6.9 Reading data from the module........................................................................3-763.6.10 Error handling..................................................................................................3-773.6.11 Start-up, time and message characteristics of FMCS_PID ............................3-773.6.12 Back-up mode of the FM355...........................................................................3-793.6.13 Connections of FMCS_PID .............................................................................3-793.6.14 Operator control and monitoring of FMCS_PID ..............................................3-85

4 Motor and valve

4.1 MOT_REV: Reversing motor ............................................................................4-14.1.1 Description of MOT_REV..................................................................................4-14.1.2 Connections of MOT_REV................................................................................4-64.1.3 Operator control and monitoring of MOT_REV.................................................4-94.2 MOT_SPED: Motor with two speeds...............................................................4-114.2.1 Description of MOT_SPED .............................................................................4-114.2.2 Connections of MOT_SPED ...........................................................................4-154.2.3 Operator control and monitoring of MOT_SPED ............................................4-184.3 MOTOR: Motor with one control signal ...........................................................4-194.3.1 Description of MOTOR....................................................................................4-194.3.2 Connections of MOTOR..................................................................................4-234.3.3 Operator control and monitoring of MOTOR...................................................4-264.4 VAL_MOT: Motor valve control .......................................................................4-274.4.1 Description of VAL_MOT ................................................................................4-274.4.2 Connections of VAL_MOT ..............................................................................4-324.4.3 Operator control and monitoring of VAL_MOT ...............................................4-354.5 VALVE: Valve control......................................................................................4-374.5.1 Description of VALVE......................................................................................4-374.5.2 Connections of VALVE....................................................................................4-414.5.3 Operator control and monitoring of VALVE.....................................................4-43

5 Other technological blocks

5.1 ADD4_P: Addition for a maximum of 4 values..................................................5-15.1.1 ADD4_P: Addition for a maximum of 4 values..................................................5-15.1.2 Connections ADD4_P .......................................................................................5-25.2 ADD8_P: Addition for a maximum of 8 values..................................................5-21.1.1 ADD8_P: Addition for a maximum of 8 values..................................................5-25.2.2 Connections ADD8_P .......................................................................................5-35.3 AVER_P: Time average ....................................................................................5-35.3.1 Description of AVER_P .....................................................................................5-35.3.2 Connections of AVER_P ...................................................................................5-5

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksA5E00127672-01 v

5.4 COUNT_P: Counter ..........................................................................................5-55.4.1 Description of COUNT_P..................................................................................5-55.4.2 Connections of COUNT_P................................................................................5-75.5 DEADT_P: Dead time element .........................................................................5-75.5.1 Description of DEADT_P...................................................................................5-75.5.2 Connections of DEADT_P.................................................................................5-95.6 DIF_P: Differentiation........................................................................................5-95.6.1 Description of DIF_P .........................................................................................5-95.6.2 Connections of DIF_P .....................................................................................5-115.7 DOSE: Dosing process ...................................................................................5-115.7.1 Description of DOSE .......................................................................................5-115.7.2 Connections of DOSE .....................................................................................5-165.7.3 Operator control and monitoring of DOSE......................................................5-205.8 ELAP_CNT: Operating hours counter.............................................................5-245.8.1 Description of ELAP_CNT...............................................................................5-245.8.2 Connections of ELAP_CNT.............................................................................5-265.8.3 Operator control and monitoring via ELAP_CNT............................................5-275.9 INTERLOK: Interlocking display......................................................................5-285.9.1 Description of INTERLOK ...............................................................................5-285.9.2 Connections of INTERLOK .............................................................................5-305.9.3 Operator control and monitoring of INTERLOK ..............................................5-315.10 INT_P: Integration ...........................................................................................5-315.10.1 Description of INT_P .......................................................................................5-315.10.2 Connections of INT_P.....................................................................................5-355.11 LIMITS_P: Limiter ...........................................................................................5-365.11.1 Description of LIMITS_P .................................................................................5-365.11.2 Connections of LIMITS_P ...............................................................................5-385.12 MEANTM_P: Mean time value........................................................................5-395.12.1 Description of MEANTM_P .............................................................................5-395.12.2 Connections of MEANTM_P ...........................................................................5-405.13 MUL4_P: Multiplication of a maximum of 4 values .........................................5-415.13.1 Description of MUL4_P ...................................................................................5-415.13.2 Connections of MUL4_P .................................................................................5-425.14 MUL8_P: Multiplication of a maximum of 8 values .........................................5-425.14.1 Description of MUL8_P ...................................................................................5-425.14.2 Connections of MUL8_P .................................................................................5-435.15 OB1_TIME: Determining the degree of CPU utilization..................................5-435.15.1 Description of OB1_TIME ...............................................................................5-435.15.2 Connections of OB1_TIME .............................................................................5-455.16 POLYG_P: Polygon with a maximum of 8 time slices ....................................5-455.16.1 Description of POLYG_P ................................................................................5-455.16.2 Connections of POLYG_P ..............................................................................5-475.17 PT1_P: First-order time-delay.........................................................................5-485.17.1 Description of PT1_P ......................................................................................5-485.17.2 Connections of PT1_P ....................................................................................5-495.18 RAMP_P: Ramp generation............................................................................5-505.18.1 Description of RAMP_P ..................................................................................5-505.18.2 Connections of RAMP_P ................................................................................5-515.19 SPLITR_P: Split Range...................................................................................5-525.19.1 Description of SPLITR_P ................................................................................5-525.19.2 Connections of SPLITR_P ..............................................................................5-545.20 SWIT_CNT: Switching operation counter .......................................................5-555.20.1 Description of SWIT_CNT...............................................................................5-555.20.2 Connections of SWIT_CNT.............................................................................5-575.20.3 Operator control and monitoring via SWIT_CNT ............................................5-58

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological Blocksvi A5E00127672-01

6 Conversion blocks

6.1 General information on the conversion blocks..................................................6-16.2 Description of R_TO_DW..................................................................................6-16.3 Connections of R_TO_DW ...............................................................................6-2

7 Operator control blocks

7.1 Overview of the operator control blocks............................................................7-17.2 OP_A: Analog value operation..........................................................................7-67.2.1 Description of OP_A..........................................................................................7-67.2.2 Connections of OP_A........................................................................................7-87.2.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_A.........................................................7-97.3 OP_A_LIM: Analog value operation (limiting) ...................................................7-97.3.1 Description of OP_A_LIM..................................................................................7-97.3.2 Connections of OP_A_LIM..............................................................................7-127.3.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_A_LIM...............................................7-127.4 OP_A_RJC: Analog value operation (rejecting)..............................................7-137.4.1 Description of OP_A_RJC...............................................................................7-137.4.2 Connections of OP_A_RJC.............................................................................7-167.4.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_A_RJC..............................................7-177.5 OP_D: Digital value operation (2 pushbuttons)...............................................7-177.5.1 Description of OP_D .......................................................................................7-177.5.2 Connections of OP_D .....................................................................................7-197.5.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_D ......................................................7-207.6 OP_D3: Digital value operation (3 pushbuttons).............................................7-207.6.1 Description of OP_D3 .....................................................................................7-207.6.2 Connections of OP_D3 ...................................................................................7-237.6.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_D3 ....................................................7-247.7 OP_TRIG: Digital value operation (1 pushbutton) ..........................................7-257.7.1 Description of OP_TRIG .................................................................................7-257.7.2 Connections of OP_TRIG ...............................................................................7-277.7.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_TRIG ................................................7-28

8 Message blocks

8.1 Overview of the message blocks ......................................................................8-18.2 MESSAGE: Message block (configurable messages)......................................8-28.2.1 Description of MESSAGE .................................................................................8-28.2.2 Connections of MESSAGE ...............................................................................8-5

9 Blocks for Batch Flexible

9.1 Overview of the batch blocks ............................................................................9-19.2 AF_6: Automation function interface BATCH flexible .......................................9-49.2.1 Description of AF_6...........................................................................................9-49.2.2 Connections of AF_n.........................................................................................9-59.2.3 Operator control and monitoring of AF_6..........................................................9-79.3 AF_12: Automation function interface BATCH flexible .....................................9-89.3.1 Description of AF_12.........................................................................................9-89.3.2 Operator control and monitoring of AF_12........................................................9-9

23.08.200123.08.2001

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksA5E00127672-01 vii

9.4 AF_16S: Automation function interface BATCH flexible.................................9-109.4.1 Description of AF_16S ....................................................................................9-109.4.2 Operator control and monitoring of AF_16S ...................................................9-119.5 AF_24: Automation function interface BATCH flexible ...................................9-129.5.1 Description of AF_24.......................................................................................9-129.5.2 Operator control and monitoring of AF_24......................................................9-139.6 TRANS: Transition interface BATCH flexible..................................................9-149.6.1 Description of TRANS .....................................................................................9-149.6.2 Connections of TRANS...................................................................................9-149.7 UNIT: Unit allocation interface BATCH flexible...............................................9-159.7.1 Description of UNIT.........................................................................................9-159.7.2 Connections of UNIT.......................................................................................9-169.7.3 Operator control and monitoring via UNIT ......................................................9-17

A Appendix

A.1 Technical data.................................................................................................. A-1

Glossary

Index

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological Blocksviii A5E00127672-01

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksA5E00127072-01 1-1

1 General information on the block description

The block descriptions always have the same structure. The sections have thefollowing meaning:

Heading of the block description

Example: CTRL_PID: PID controller block

The header begins with the type name of the block (CTRL_PID). This symbol nameis entered in the symbol name and has to be unique within your project.The type name also includes information on the task/function of the block (PIDcontroller block).

Object name (Type + Number)

FB x

The object name for the block type is made up of the realization typeFunction block = FB, Function = FC and the Block number = x.

Command button for the displaying the block connections

Example:

You can jump directly to the list of block connections of the designated block byclicking on the "Block Connections" command button. The preceding block symbolis used as an eye-catcher in order to find the command button rapidly.

Function

This briefly describes the function of the block.Further information relating to complex blocks is provided in the section "Operatingprinciple".

Operating principle

Further information on the function of the individual inputs, operating modes, timesequences, etc. You should know the contexts described here in order to use theblock effectively.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

General information on the block description

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological Blocks1-2 A5E00127072-01

Calling OBs

Here you will find information relating to the organization blocks (OBs), in which thedescribed block must be installed. When using the CFC installation is carried out inthe cyclic OB (watchdog interrupt) and automatically into the OBs which are listedin the task list of the block (for example in OB100 for restarting).

CFC creates the required OBs while compiling. If you use the blocks without CFC,you have to program these OBs and call the instance of the block in them.

Error handling

You will find the error display in the CFC chart at the Boolean block output ENO.The value corresponds to the BIE (Binary result in STEP 7-STL after ending theblock) or the OK bit (in SCL notation) and means:

ENO=BIE=OK=1 (TRUE) ->The result of the block is OK.

ENO=BIE=OK=0 (FALSE) ->The result or the conditions for its calculation (e.g.input values, operating modes, etc.) are not valid.

In addition, for FBs, you will find the inverted BIE in output QERR of the instanceDB:

QERR=NOT ENO

The error display arises by two independent routes:

The operating system recognizes a processing error (for example: value overflow,called system functions supply an error code with binary input bit=0).This is a system utility and is not mentioned specifically in the individual blockdescription.

The block algorithm checks values and operating modes for their functional legality.These error cases are documented in the description of the block.

The evaluation of the error indication can be used, for example, to generatemessages (refer to the section on alarm blocks) or to utilize substitute values forinvalid results.

Start-up characteristics

A difference is made between:

• Initial startThe block is called for the first time from the OB, in which it is installed. As arule this is the OB in which normal, process-specific processing occurs (forexample: the watchdog interrupt OB).The block enters the status corresponding to the input parameters. These canbe initial values (also refer to the Connections) or values which you havealready been configured, for example in CFC. The initial-start behavior is notdescribed separately unless the block deviates from this rule.

• Start-upThe block is executed once during a CPU start-up. This is achieved by callingthe block from the start-up OB (where it is additionally installed eitherautomatically via ES or manually by you via STEP 7). In this case the start-upcharacteristics are described.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Time response

The block with these characteristics must be installed into a watchdog interrupt OB.It calculates its time constants/parameters on the basis of its sampling time (thetime between two consecutive cyclic processing steps).During CFC project planning on ES, the sampling time is determined by steppingdown the so-called sequence group. This ensures that the block is not executedduring every OB run.This sampling time is entered at the connections in the parameter SAMPLE_T.

This takes place automatically during CFC project planning/configuration afterinstallation of the block in OB and runtime group (for this reason, this input is notvisible here for the user).

When programming is carried out using STEP 7 this has to be carried out by hand.

Reference is then made to the time characteristic when instructed by the block.

Message characteristics

The block with these characteristics signals various events to the higher-rankingOS. If they exist, the parameters required to generate messages are documented.Blocks not having message characteristics can be complemented by additionalalarm blocks. A reference to the message characteristics in contained in thedescription of the individual blocks with signaling capabilities.

Connections of ...

The connections provide the data interface of the block. In addition you cantransfer data to the block and fetch results from the block.

Connection(parameter)

Meaning Data type Default I/O Attr. OC&M Valid values

U1 Addend 1 REAL 0 I Q + >0

.....

The "Connections" table lists all the input and output parameters of the block type,which the user can access with the configuration tools. They are alphabetically.Elements which can only be accessed from the algorithm of the block are not listed(so-called internal variables).The columns have the following meaning:

Connection = Name of parameter, derived from the English designationfor example PV_IN = Process Variable INput (process variable, control variable).Wherever laid down by SIMATIC conventions, the same name rules have beenused.

The state of delivery of the block display in CFC is identified as follows: Connectionname bold = Connection displayed, normal = Not displayed.

Meaning = Function (possibly short description)

Data type = S7 data type of the parameter (BOOL, REAL, etc.).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Initial (Default) = The value of the parameter before the block is executed for thefirst time (unless changed by configuration).

I/O = Type of access of the block algorithm to the parameter. Differentiatesbetween inputs, non-interacting inputs and outputs (see table)

Abbreviation I/O

I Input. Initialize block with parameters (representation in CFC: left-hand block side)

O Output. Output value. (representation in CFC: right-hand block side)

IO Input/output. Non-interacting input which is written by the OS and which can be writtenback from the block(representation in CFC: left-hand block side)

Attr. (Attribute) = Additional features of the parameter when used under CFC.Input and input/output parameters which cannot be interconnected can beconfigured (for FCs on-line only input/output parameters).Output parameters cannot be configured and can be transferred in CFC byinterconnecting to an input of the same data type.

Additional properties of the parameter are specified as follows:

Abbreviation Attribute

B Operator controllable (via OS block only). The element can be write-accessed from an OS.Set to invisible in the CFC.

E Is transferred to the OS driven by changes

M MESSAGE ID for message block (e.g. ALARM_8P) not configurable.ID is assigned by message server.

Q Interconnectable. The element can be interconnected with another output of the sametype.

OC&M= Parameters marked with "+" can be operator controlled and monitored viathe corresponding OS block.

Valid values = Additional limitation within the data type range of values.

Operator control and monitoring

If an OS block exists for the AS block, the views of the faceplates are described ina table.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001


2 General information on the faceplates

What is a faceplate?

The graphical display of all the elements of a technological block in the automationsystem which is to be used for operator control and monitoring. The faceplate blockis displayed in a separate window in the OS and can be called up by means ofdisplay selection buttons, measuring point list, block symbol, etc.

Prerequisites

In order to use the faceplates, you require a system with WinCC and the "BasisProcess Control" and "Advanced Process Control" control system packages.

The faceplates are designed for graphics boards with a resolution of 1280 x 1024pixels At a size of 320 x 256 pixels, 12 faceplates can be shown in the form of amatrix in 3 rows each with 4 columns in one display without using scroll bars. In thecase of operation with graphics boards which have a lower resolution, scroll barsmay be displayed or the number of blocks may be reduced.

Advantages of the faceplates

The faceplates have the following advantages:

• Easy to learn

• Simple configuration by defined interface between faceplate and AS block

• Simple handling due to few handling instructions

• Clear representation of the process procedure

• WinCC and Windows conformity

Display

The faceplates have two different display forms:

• Group display: Display of the AS values in various views with selectionelement for the loop monitor display

• Loop monitor display: Display of the elements of all the views of the groupdisplay.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

General information on the faceplates


Further information

Detailed information on the design, configuration and testing of a faceplate can befound in the manual "Programming Instructions Creating Blocks for PCS 7".

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001


3 Measurement and control

3.1 CTRL_PID: PID controller block

3.1.1 Description of CTRL_PID


FB 61

Function

The CTRL_PID controller block is a continuous PID controller used for setting upthe following standard controller circuits: fixed setpoint control, cascade control(single / multiple cascades), ratio control, synchro control, proportional control.

In addition to the controller functions themselves, the controller block also includesthe following processing possibilities:

• Modes: Manual mode, automatic or tracking

• Limit monitoring of the process variable and error signal and messagegeneration via ALARM8_P block.

• Disturbance variable

• Setpoint tracking (SP=PV_IN)

• Value range setting for setpoint and process variable (physical normalization)

• Setting the range of values for the manipulated variable (physical normalizing)

• Dead band (on threshold) in the error-signal branch

• Proportional, integral and derivative action, which can be activated and de-activated individually

• The proportional and derivative actions can be switched into the feedbackpath.

• Operating point setting for P-or PD controller operation

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Measurement and control


Calling OBs

The watchdog interrupt OB into which the block is installed (for example OB32).Additionally in OB100 (see start-up characteristics).

Operating principle

The block functions as a PID controller (with delayed derivative action) and has thestep response shown below. The integrator functions according to the trapezoidrule.

t

GAIN * TV

TM_LAG + SAMPLE_T/2

LMN_HLM

LMN_LLM

LMN

1 if t>00 if t<0

ER(t)=

GAIN

GAIN

TN

{

ER(t)*GAIN

Step response of CTRL_PID

Note

The input parameter LMNR_IN is displayed in the faceplate (loop display) as themanipulated variable. If there is no position feedback available from the process,you can interconnect the manipulated-variable output LMN with LMNR_IN in CFCin order to display the manipulated variable in the loop display.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.1.2 Signal processing in the setpoint and process-variable branchesof CTRL_PID

Setpoint generation

The setpoint SP can be obtained from three different sources which are selectedvia the inputs SP_TRK_ON and SPEXTSEL_OP in accordance with the followingtable:

SP_TRK_ON SPEXTSEL_OP SP= State

0 0 SP_OP Internal setpoint

0 1 SP_EXT External setpoint

1 Irrelevant PV_IN Tracked setpoint

Internal setpoint

Operation and control of the internal setpoint SP_OP is carried out via OP_A_LIMor OP_A_RJC (range SP_LLM - SP_HLM).

External Setpoint

The external setpoint SP_EXT can be interconnected and is limited to the range(SPEXTLLM,SPEXTHLM).

The change in the internal or external setpoint is limited to a maximum gradient(SPDRLM, SPURLM), in as far as the setpoint ramp has been activated(SPRAMPOF = 0).

Tracked setpoint

If SP_TRK_ON=1, the process variable PV_IN is used as the setpoint, whereby theerror signal ER=0 is used.

The tracked setpoint takes priority over the internal or external setpoint.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Error signal

It is formed from the effective setpoint SP and the process variable PV_IN and isavailable at the output ER after the dead band DEADB_W.

' ( $ ' % B :

( 5

6 3 � 3 9 B ,1

Error Signal Alarm

The error signal ER is monitored to alarm limits (ERL_ALM, ERH_ALM) with acommon hysteresis (ER_HYS). Display is carried out at the corresponding outputs(QERL_ALM, QERH_ALM).

Process Variable Alarm

The process variable PV_IN is monitored to the warning and alarm limits(PVL_ALM, PVL_WRN, PVH_WRN, PVH_ALM) with a common hysteresis (HYS).Display is carried out at the corresponding outputs (QPVL_ALM, QPVL_WRN,QPVH_WRN, QPVH_ALM).

Physical normalization

The error signal ER is normalized from the physical measuring range of theprocess variable (NM_PVHR, NM_PVLR) to a percentage.

100*__ PVLRNMPVHRNM

ERERNorm. −

=

After the PID algorithm the manipulated variable is denormalized from apercentage value to the physical measuring range of the manipulated value(NM_LMNHR,NM_LMNLR).

)__(*100

LMN + NM_LMNLR normiert LMNLRNMLMNHRNMLMN −=

Internal or external setpoint, process variable as well as the correspondingparameters are all entered in the physical measuring range of the process variable.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



The manual value, follow-up value of the manipulated variable, feedforward controlas well as the corresponding parameters are all entered in the physical measuringrange of the manipulated variable.

The controller gain GAIN is specified in normalized (dimensionless) form.

3.1.3 Creation of the manipulated variable of CTRL_PID

The manipulated variable LMN can stem from three different sources which areselected via the inputs LMN_SEL, LIOP_MAN_SEL, AUT_L and AUT_ON_OP asshown in table:

LMN_SEL LIOP_MAN_SEL AUT_L AUT_ON_OP LMN= State

X0 0 X 0 MAN_OP (is limited) Manual operation, setby OS

0 0 X 0 MAN_OP (is limited) Manual operation, setby OS

0 0 X 1 Calculated by PIDalgorithm

Automatic operation,set by OS

X0 1 0 X MAN_OP (is limited) Manual operation, setby AUT_L=0

0 1 0 X MAN_OP (is limited) Manual operation, setby AUT_L=0

0 1 1 X Calculated by PIDalgorithm

Automatic operation,set by AUT_L=1

1 X0

1

X

1

X1

x

LMN_TRK Manipulated variabletracked

1 X X X LMN_TRK Manipulated variabletracked

x = Any state

The normalized manipulated variable is formed in accordance with the followingalgorithm in automatic operation:

Norm.Norm. ERsLAGTM

sTV

sTNGAINLMN *

*_1

*

*

11*

+

++=

and then denormalized. Also refer to: Complex number

Disturbance variable and limitation

In automatic mode the disturbance variable DISV is added at the output of the PIDalgorithm and then the result is limited to the range LMN_LLM to LMN_HLM.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.1.4 Manual, automatic and follow-up operation of CTRL_PID

Manual mode

The manipulated variable is determined by OS operator control of the inputMAN_OP. Operation and limiting is carried out by means of OP_A_LIM orOP_A_RJC (range MAN_HLM – MAN_LLM). The output values of QVHL andQVLL of OP_A_LIM or OP_A_RJC are transferred to the outputs QLMN_HLM andQLMN_LLM.

Automatic mode

The manipulated variable is calculated by the PID algorithm. The controlparameters GAIN, TN, TV and TM_LAG can be interconnected.

• The controller direction of control action can be reversed (rising error signalcauses a falling manipulated variable) by configuring the proportional gainGAIN negatively. The proportional action can be de-activated by setting P_SEL= 0. The integral action can be de-activated by setting TN=0. If the manipulatedvariable LMN is limited in automatic operation mode, the integrator is set tohold (anti wind up). The direction of action of the integrator is reversed bychanging the sign of the parameter TN.

• Operating point: It sets the operating point at the input LMN_OFF. In automaticmode this value replaces the integral action of the PID algorithm when theintegral action is de-activated. The operating point of the entered in themeasuring range of the manipulated variable.

• The derivative action is designed as a delaying derivative unit. It can be de-activated by setting TV=0. The direction of action of the differentiator isreversed by changing the sign of the parameter TV.

• Proportional action in feedback path: If PFDB_SEL = TRUE, the proportionalaction is switched to the feedback. A control jump thus has no influence on theproportional action. The changeover of PFDB_SEL is not bumpless.

• Derivative action in feedback path: If DFDB_SEL = TRUE, the derivative actionis switched to the feedback. A control jump thus has no influence on thederivative action. The changeover of DFDB_SEL is not bumpless.

Tracking mode

In this state (LMN_SEL=1) the manipulated variable is taken from theinterconnected tracked value LMN_TRK and applied to the output. Whereby theoutputs QLMN_HLM and QLMN_LLM are set to FALSE.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Cascading several PID controllers

The manipulated variable LMN of the master controller is connected to the inputSP_EXT of the follower controller. In addition it must be ensured that the mastercontroller is taken over into tracking mode operation if the cascade is interrupted.To this purpose a signal QCAS_CUT is formed in the follower controller and isinterconnected to the input LMN_SEL of the master controller. A interruption canbe caused by manual or tracking mode, by setpoint operation or manipulatedvariable tracking of the follower controller.

QCAS_CUT= NOT( QMAN_AUT) OR LMN_SEL OR SP_TRK_ON OR NOT(QSPEXT_ON)

The tracking input LMN_TRK of the master controller is connected to the output SPof the secondary controller in order to avoid a jump occurring when the cascade isclosed again.

3.1.5 Changing operating modes in CTRL_PID

Operating mode selection

This can be triggered either by operator control or via interconnected inputs.

External/Internal setpoint

The changeover is carried out by OS operation of the input SPEXTSEL_OP or byinterconnection of SPEXON_L. These changeovers must be enabled by using thecorresponding enable inputs SPINT_EN, SPEXT_EN or the selection inputLIOP_INT_SEL.

If SPBUMPON = 1, the effective setpoint is taken over to the internal setpoint inorder to allow a bumpless changeover from external or tacking mode to internalmode.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Enabling the changeover between the internal and external setpoint

/,23B0$1B6(/

$8723B(1

0$123B(1

)$/6(

)$/6(

40$123

4$8723

�

�

�

�

QSPEXTEN = TRUE: SPEXTSEL_OP can be operated from FALSE(internal setpoint) to TRUE (external setpoint).

QSPINTEN = TRUE: SPEXTSEL_OP can be operated from TRUE(external setpoint) to FALSE (internal setpoint).

If appropriate, SPEXTSEL_OP is tracked or reset.

Enabling operation of the setpoint via the operator input

63B23B21

Q_SP_OP = TRUE: SP_OP can b operated.

If appropriate, SP_OP is tracked or reset.

Manual/Automatic

The changeover is carried out by OS operation of the input AUT_ON_OP or byinterconnection of AUT_L. This changeover must be enabled by using thecorresponding enable inputs MANOP_EN, AUTOP_EN or the selection inputLIOP_MAN_SEL.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Enabling the changeover between manual mode and automatic mode

/,23B0$1B6(/

$8723B(1

0$123B(1

)$/6(

)$/6(

40$123

4$8723

�

�

�

�

QAUTOP = TRUE: AUT_ON_OP can be operated from FALSE(manual mode) to TRUE (automatic mode).

QMANOP = TRUE: AUT_ON_OP can be operated from TRUE(automatic mode) to FALSE (manual mode).

If appropriate, AUT_ON_OP is tracked or reset.


23B$B/,0��23B$B5-&

23B(1 423B(1/0123B21 4/0123

QLMNOP = TRUE: MAN_OP can be operated.

If appropriate, MAN_OP is tracked or reset.

Special measures are taken in the modes listed below in order to ensure abumpless changeover:

• External setpoint / Setpoint tracking: At SPBUMPON = TRUE the internalsetpoint SP_OP is set equal to the effective (external or tracked) setpoint.

• Automatic mode: The manual value MAN_OP is tracked to the effectivemanipulated variable.

• Tracking mode: The manual value MAN_OP is tracked to the effectivemanipulated variable.

• Manual operation: The integrator is tracked so that spike-free changing over toautomatic operation is possible.

Integrated component = Manipulated variable (as a percentage) – Proportionalcomponent – Disturbance variable (as a percentage).

The derivative component is de-activated and compensated.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.1.6 Error handling in CTRL_PID

Error handling

The following cases are handled by the block algorithm:

Operator control error

If at least one operator error occurs during the operation of one of the parametersSPEXTSEL_OP, AUT_ON_OP, SP_OP or MAN_OP, QOP_ERR = 1 is set.Otherwise QOP_ERR = 0 is set. An operator error only remains active for onecycle.

• Parameter configuration error NM_PVHR <= NM_PVHR:

• The error signal ER is set to zero and ENO=0 or QERR=1 is set.

• NM_LMNHR <= NM_LMNHR:

• During automatic operation the disturbance variable is output and ENO=0 orQERR=1 is set.

• Absolute value (TN) < SAMPLE_T/2:

• If TN > 0, TN = SAMPLE_T/2 is used for calculation. If TN < 0, TN = -SAMPLE_T/2 is used. If TN= 0, the integrator is de-activated and the operatingpoint LMN_OFF is active.

• Absolute value (TV) < SAMPLE_T:

• If TV > 0, TV = SAMPLE_T is used for calculation. If TV < 0, TN = -SAMPLE_Tis used. If TV = 0, the differentiator is de-activated.

• TM_LAG < SAMPLE_T/2:

• If TM_LAG < SAMPLE_T/2, TM_LAG < SAMPLE_T/2 is used for calculation.In these cases the differential component behaves as an ideal differentiator.

3.1.7 Start-up, time and message characteristics of CTRL_PID


When the CPU starts upAnlauf, the CTRL_PID is set in manual operation modewith the internal setpoint. For this the block must be called from the start-up OB.With CFC project planning this is handled by CFC. With simple STEP 7 resourcesyou will have to enter the call in the start-up OB.After start-up, messages will be suppressed for the number of cycles configured inthe value RUNUPCYC.

Time response

The block must be called via a watchdog interrupt OB. The sampling timeAbtastzeitof the block is entered in the parameter SAMPLE_T.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




The CTRL_PID block uses the ALARM8_P block for generating messages.

Messages are triggered by

• The limit monitoring functions of the process values and the system deviation,

• The CSF signal which is referenced as a control system error byinterconnection.

Messages regarding limit infringements can be suppressed individually via thecorresponding M_SUP_xx inputs. The process messages (not process controlmessages!) can be completely blocked with MSG_LOCK.

QMSG_SUP is set if the RUNUPCYC cycles have not expired yet since a restart,MSG_LOCK = TRUE or MSG_STAT = 21.

The message texts of the CTRL_PID block and their assignment to the blockparameters are listed in table.

Assignment of message texts and message classto the block parameters

Message No. Block parameter Default message text Message class Can besuppressed by

1 QPVH_ALM Process variable too high AH M_SUP_AH,MSG_LOCK

2 QPVH_WRN Process variable high WH M_SUP_WH,MSG_LOCK

3 QPVL_WRN Process variable low WL M_SUP_WL,MSG_LOCK

4 QPVL_ALM Process variable too low AL M_SUP_AL,MSG_LOCK

5 CSF External error S -

6 QERH_ALM Error signal too high AH M_SUP_ER,MSG_LOCK

7 QERL_ALM Error signal too low AL M_SUP_ER,MSG_LOCK

The first three of the auxiliary process values of the message block have BATCHflexible data assigned, the fourth is reserved for PV_IN and the remaining ones(AUX_PRx) can be assigned freely.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Assignment of the auxiliary process value for the block parameters

Value Block parameter

1 BA_NA

2 STEP_NO

3 BA_ID

4 PV_IN

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR010

Monitoring of the process value

Does not exist

3.1.8 Block diagram of CTRL_PID

Note

In order to print out the block diagram, select landscape format as the page settingin the "Print" dialog box. The diagram is then printed on two pages, which you canjoin, if you want to.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



4835/0

4/01B//04/01B+/0

LMN_OFF

10B/01+5

'($'%B:�

GAIN

�

SK\V

10B/01/5

�

SK\V

10B/01/510B/01+5

�

SK\V

70B/$*79

4'15/0

23B$B/,0��23B$B5-&

/,1.B21

/,1.B88

9

�

�

/,23B,17B6(/

63(;21B/

63(;76(/B23

SP_OP63B+/063B//0

23B$B/,0��23B$B5-&

/,1.B21

8

9

�

�

/,23B0$1B6(/

$87B/

$87B21B23

MAN_OP0$1B+/00$1B//0

71� ��

�

�

�

�

��

/01B6(/

�

�/01B75.

�

�

635$032)

6$03/(B7

6385/063'5/0

SP

�

�

PV_IN

63B75.B21

PV_IN

/01B+/0/01B//0

LMN

40$1B$87

ER

463B+/0463B//0

40$1B+/040$1B//0

DISV

49+/49//

49+/49//

25

�

�

463(;721

-1+<6

439/B$/0439/B:51

439+B:51439+B$/0

39/B$/039/B:5139+B:5139+B$/0

6$03/(B7

10B39/510B39+5

6$03/(B7�

�

�

�

')'%B6(/

3)'%B6(/

SP

8B+/8B//

8B+/8B//

71

758( %75$&.

/,1.B8

%75$&.63%80321

63B75.B21

63B(;7

63(;7+/063(;7//0

463B+/0463B//0

�

�

3B6(/

�

SK\V

10B39/510B39+5

,17B+1(*,17B+326

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.1.9 Connections of CTRL_PID


Meaning Data type Initial I/O Attr. OC&M Valid values

AUT_L INTERCONNECTABLEINPUT FOR MAN/AUTO: 0:MANUAL, 1: AUTO

BOOL 0 I Q

AUT_ON_OP

OPERATOR INPUT MODE1=AUTO, 0= MANUAL :

BOOL 0 IO B +

AUTOP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATORMAY INPUT AUTO

BOOL 1 I Q

AUX_PRx AUXILIARY VALUE x ANY 0 IO Q

BA_EN BATCH ENABLE BOOL 0 I Q +

BA_ID BATCH ID DWORD 0 IO Q +

BA_NA BATCH NAME STRING[16] ’’ I Q +

CSF CONTROL SYSTEMFAULT

BOOL 0 I Q

DEADB_W DEADBAND WIDTH REAL 0 I + >=0

DFDB_SEL DERIVATIVE ACTION INFEEDBACK PATH (1:ACTIVE)

BOOL 0 I Q

DISV DISTURBANCE VARIABLE REAL 0 I Q

EXT CONTROL DIFFERENCEError signal

REAL 0 O +

ER_HYS HYSTERESIS OF ERRORSIGNAL

REAL 0.1 I + >= 0

ERH_ALM ER: HH ALARM / Errorsignal: Upper alarm limit

REAL 100 I + >DEADBW

ERL_ALM ER: HH ALARM / Errorsignal: Lower alarm limit

REAL -100 I + < -DEADBW

GAIN PROPORTIONAL GAIN REAL 1 I +

HYS HYSTERESIS OFPROCESS VARIABLE

REAL 5 I + >=0

INT_HNEG INTEGRAL ACTION HOLDIN NEGATIVE DIRECTION(1: ACTIVE)

BOOL 0 I Q

INT_HPOS INTEGRAL ACTION HOLDIN POSITIVE DIRECTION(1: ACTIVE)

BOOL 0 I Q

LIOP_INT_SEL

SELECT: 1=LINKING ,0=OPERATION1: Interconnectionactive 0: Operator controlactive

BOOL 0 I Q

LIOP_MAN_SEL

SELECT: 1=LINKING,0=OPERATOR ACTIVE1: Interconnectionactive 0: Operator controlactive

BOOL 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





LMN MANIPULATED VALUEoutput

REAL 0 O

LMN_HLM HIGH LIMIT VALUE FORMANIPULATED VARIABLE

REAL 100 I Q + LMN_HLM >LMN_LLM

LMN_LLM LOW LIMIT VALUE FORMANIPULATED VARIABLE

REAL 0 I Q + LMN_LLM <LMN_HLM

LMN_OFF MANIPULATED VARIABLEOFFSET / Operating point

REAL 0 I Q +

LMN_SEL SELECT EXTERNALTRACKING VALUE1=ACTIVE1: External manipulatedvariable active

BOOL 0 I Q

LMN_TRK EXTERNAL TRACKINGVALUEExternal manipulatedvariable

REAL 0 I Q

LMNOP_ON ENABLE: 1=OPERATORMAYINPUT MAN_OP1: Operator enable formanipulated variableLMN_OP

BOOL 1 I Q

LMNR_IN FEEDBACK OF PROCESSMANIPULATED VALUEFOR OS

REAL 0 I Q

M_SUP_AH 1=SUPPRESS PV HHALARM1: Message suppressionupper alarm processvariable

BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_AL 1=SUPPRESS PV LLALARM1: Message suppressionlower alarm processvariable

BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_ER SUPPRESS ER ALARMSMessage suppression foralarms at error signal

BOOL 1 I +

M_SUP_WH 1=SUPPRESS PV HALARM(WARNING)1: Message suppressionupper warning processvariable

BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_WL 1=SUPPRESS PV LALARM(WARNING)1: Message suppressionlower warning processvariable

BOOL 0 I +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





MAN_HLM HIGH LIMIT MANUALVALUE FORMANIPULATED VARIABLE

REAL 100 I +

MAN_LLM LOW LIMIT MANUALVALUE FORMANIPULATED VARIABLE

REAL 0 I +

MAN_OP OPERATOR INPUT FORCONTROL OUTPUTVALUE

REAL 0 IO B +

MANOP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATORMAYINPUT MANUAL

BOOL 1 I Q

MO_PVHR UPPER DISPLAY LIMIT(MEASURING RANGE)

REAL 110 I +

MO_PVLR LOWER DISPLAY LIMIT(MEASURING RANGE)

REAL -10 I +

MSG_ACK MESSAGEACKNOWLEDGE

WORD 0 O

MSG_EVID MESSAGE IDALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O +

MSG_LOCK ENABLE 1=MESSAGESLOCKED /1 : Process-state-specificmessage suppression

BOOL 0 I Q +

MSG_STAT MESSAGE STATUSALARM8_P STATUS

WORD 0 O

NM_LMNHR LMN NORMALIZINGRANGEHIGH LIMIT Upper normalizing limit ofthe manipulated value(measuring range)

REAL 100 I

NM_LMNLR LMN NORMALIZINGRANGELOW LIMIT Lower normalizing limit ofthe manipulated value(measuring range)

REAL 0 I

NM_PVHR PV NORMALIZING RANGEHIGH LIMIT Upper normalizing limit ofthe process variable(measuring range)

REAL 100 I

NM_PVLR PV NORMALIZING RANGELOW LIMITLower normalizing limit ofthe process variable(measuring range)

REAL 0 I

OCCUPIED OCCUPIED BY BATCH BOOL 0 I Q +

OPTI_EN 1=PID optimization enable BOOL 0 I +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





P_SEL PROPORTIONALSELECTION(1: ACTIVE)

BOOL 1 I Q

PFDB_SEL PROPORTIONAL ACTIONINFEEDBACK PATH (1:ACTIVE)

BOOL 0 I Q

PV_IN PROCESS VALUE REAL 0 IO QE +

PVH_ALM PV: H ALARMProcess variable: Upperalarm limit

REAL 100 I + PVH_ALM >PVL_ALM

PVH_WRN PV: H ALARM (WARNING)Process variable: Upperwarning limit

REAL 95 I + PVH_WRN >PVL_WRN

PVL_ALM PV: LL ALARMProcess variable: Loweralarm limit

REAL 0 I + PVL_ALM <PVH_ALM

PVL_WRN PV: L ALARM (WARNING)Process variable: Lowerwarning limit

REAL 5 I + PVL_WRN<PVH_WRN

Q_SP_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORMAYENTER SETPOINT

BOOL 0 O +

QAUT_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "AUTO"

BOOL 0 O +

QCAS_CUT 1= CASCADECONNECTION CUT

BOOL 1 O Q

QDNRLM 1=SETPOINT NEGATIVERAMP RATE LIMIT ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QERH_ALM Error signal, 1: HH ALARMactive

BOOL 0 O +

QERL_ALM Error signal, 1: LL ALARMactive

BOOL 0 O +

QERR 1=ERROR (inverted value of ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QLMN_HLM 1=HIGH LIMIT OFMANIPULATED VALUEACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QLMN_LLM 1=LOW LIMIT OFMANIPULATED VALUEACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QLMNOP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLE FOR "VALUEOPERATION"

BOOL 0 O +

QMAN_AUT 1=AUTO, 0=MANUALMODE

BOOL 0 O +

QMANOP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLE FOR "MANUAL"MODE

BOOL 0 O +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





QMSG_ERR 1=MESSAGE ERROR1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O

QMSG_SUP 1=MESSAGESUPPRESSION ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O +

QOP_ERR 1=OPERATOR ERROR BOOL 0 O

QPVH_ALM 1=HH ALARM ACTIVE BOOL 0 O

QPVH_WRN 1=L ALARM ACTIVE(WARNING)

BOOL 0 O

QPVL_ALM 1=LL ALARM ACTIVE BOOL 0 O

QPVL_WRN 1=LOW ALARM ACTIVE(WARNING)

BOOL 0 O

QSP_HLM 1=SETPOINT OUTPUTHIGH LIMIT ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QSP_LLM 1=SETPOINT OUTPUTLOW LIMIT ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QSPEXTEN STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR"EXTERNAL"

BOOL 0 O +

QSPEXTON SETPOINT 1=EXTERNAL,0=INTERNAL MODE

BOOL 0 O +

QSPINTEN STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR"INTERNAL"

BOOL 0 O +

QUPRLM 1=SETPOINT POSITIVE.RAMP RATE LIMIT ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

RUNUPCYC LAG: NUMBER OF RUNUP CYCLES

INT 3 I

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [S]/Sample time in [s]

REAL 1 I >=0.001

SP ACTIVE SETPOINT REAL 0 O E +

SP_EXT EXTERNAL SETPOINT REAL 0 I Q

SP_HLM SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT REAL 100 I + SP_HLM >SP_LLM

SP_LLM SETPOINT LOW LIMIT REAL 0 I + SP_LLM <SP_HLM

SP_OP OPERATOR INPUTSETPOINT

REAL 0 IO B +

SP_OP_ON 1 = ENABLE OPERATORFOR SETPOINT INPUT

BOOL 1 I Q

SP_TRK_ON 1=LET SP_OP EQUALPV_IN1: Track setpoint SP_OP

BOOL 0 I +

SPBUMPON 1 = ENABLE BUMPLESSFOR SETPOINT ON

BOOL 1 I +

SPDRLM NEGATIVE RAMP RATELIMIT FOR SETPOINT [1/S]

REAL 100 I +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





SPEXON_L LINKABLE INPUT TOSELECT SP_EXTInterconnectable input forinternal/external(0:Internal/1:External)

BOOL 0 I Q

SPEXT_EN ENABLE:1=OPERATORFOR "EXTERNAL"SETPOINT SOURCESELECTION

BOOL 1 I Q

SPEXTHLM HIGH LIMIT VALUE FORSP_EXT VARUpper limit for externalsetpoint

REAL 100 I Q SPEXTHLM >SPEXTLLM

SPEXTLLM LOW LIMIT VALUE FORSP_EXT VARLower limit for externalsetpoint


SPEXTSEL_OP

OPERATOR INPUT TOSELECTSP_EXT / Operator input: 0:Internal, 1: External

BOOL 0 IO B +

SPINT_EN ENABLE:1=OPERATORFOR "INTERNAL"SETPOINT SOURCESELECTION

BOOL 1 I Q

SPRAMPOF 1=ASCENT LIMIT FORSETPOINT OFF

BOOL 1 I +

SPURLM POSITIVE RAMP RATELIMIT FOR SETPOINTCHANGE [1/S]

REAL 100 I +

STEP_NO BATCH STEP NUMBER WORD 0 IO Q +

TM_LAG LAG TIME CONSTANT OFTHE DERIVATIVE ACTIONIN [s]

REAL 1 I + ≥±SAMPLE_T/2

TN RESET TIME [SEC] REAL 10 I + TN=0,

≥±SAMPLE_T/2

TV DIFFERENTIAL TIME [S] REAL 0 I + TV=0,

≥±SAMPLE_T

For explanations and meaning of the abbreviations please refer to: Generalinformation on the block description.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.1.10 Operator control and monitoring of CTRL_PID

The tables show the assignment of the parameters of the AS block to theinput/output fields of the faceplate.

Display Output/Input field Operatorauthorization

Parameters of theAS block

Operator textin the log

Default Setpoint value (as a bar) SP

(in the corresponding inputdialog box:

HL=SetpointLL=)

5 SP_HLM

SP_OP

SP_LLM

Setpoint

(upper value) MO_PVHR

(lower value) MO_PVLR

Process variable (as a bar) PV_IN(bar at extreme right)

(red= upper alarm value) PVH_ALM(red= lower alarm value) PVL_ALM(yellow= upper warningvalue)

PVH_WRN

(yellow= lower warningvalue)

PVL_WRN

Mode

(selection list:Manual/Automatic)

5

QMAN_AUT

AUT_ON_OP =0/1

Mode=Manual/Auto

Setpoint


HL=Setpoint

LL=) 5

SP

SP_HLM

SP_OP

SP_LLM Setpoint

Process variable PV_IN(unit setpoint/processvariable)

(S7_unit of PV_IN)

Manual


HL=Manual

LL=)

5

MAN_OP

MAN_HLM

MAN_OP

MAN_LLM

Manual

Manipulated variable LMNR_IN

(unit manual/manipulatedvariable)

(S7_shortcut ofMAN_OP)

Tracking LMN_SEL =1

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






(symbol bell)

(symbol bell de-activated)

QMSG_SUP

MSG_LOCK

(symbol batch) OCCUPIED

Manual (as pointer)

Manipulated variable (as ahorizontal bar)


Parameters ofthe AS block

Operator text inthe log

Maintenance Setpoint

(selection list:internal/external) 6

QSPEXTON

SPEXTSEL_OP =0/1 Internal/External

Setpoint processingBumpless ext->in 6 SPBUMPON =0/1 SP bumpless

off/onTracked manipulatedvariable=Processvariable

6 SP_TRK_ON =0/1 Track off/on

Without ramp 6 SPRAMPOF =0/1 Ascent limit on/offError signal monitoring

Suppress message 6 M_SUP_ER =0/1 Suppress ER =No/Yes

Upper limit 6 ERH_ALM ER:HH alarmLower limit 6 ERL_ALM ER:LL alarmHysteresis 6 ER_HYS ER_HysteresisUpper limit exceeded QERH_ALMLower limit exceeded QERL_ALMError signal EXT




Parameter Control parametersKP 6 GAIN GainTN s (=in sec) 6 TN TNTV s 6 TV TV

ParameterDead band 6 DEADB_W Dead bandHysteresis(in the corresponding inputdialog box:

HL=HysLL=) 6

HYS

(no check)

HYS

0,0

Hysteresis

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






(unit dead band/hysteresis) (S7_unit of PV_IN)

Lag time s 6 TM_LAG Lag time

Setpoint rampRise s (=per sec) 6 SPURLM Pos. ramp rateDrop /s 6 SPDRLM Neg. ramp rate(unit rise/drop) (S7_shortcut of

PV_IN)

Setpoint/Process variable barHL(in the corresponding inputdialog box:

HL=bar HLLL=)

6

MO_PVHR

(no check)

MO_PVHR

MO_PVLRLL(in the corresponding inputdialog box:

HL=bar LLLL=)

6

MO_PVLR

MO_PVHR

MO_PVLR

(no check)(unit HL/LL) (S7_unit of PV_IN)




Limits (blue= Display of the setpointlimit)

(upper value) SP_HLM

(lower value) SP_LLM

(yellow bars = warning)

(upper value) PVH_WRN

(lower value) PVL_WRN

(red bars = alarm)

(upper value) PVH_ALM

(lower value) PVL_ALM

Alarm

AOact (=active)

6

6

PVH_ALM

M_SUP_AH =0/1

PV:HH alarm

Suppress HH=No/Yes

WHact

66

PVH_WRNM_SUP_WH =0/1

PV:H alarmSuppress H=No/Yes

WLact

6

6

PVL_WRN

M_SUP_AL =0/1

PV:L alarm

Suppress LL=No/Yes

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






ALact

66

PVL_ALMM_SUP_WL =0/1

PV:LL alarmSuppress L=No/Yes

Setpoint

HL(in the corresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Setpoint HLLL=)

6

6

6

SP_HLM

(no check)SP_HLM

SP_LLM

SP high limit

SP high limit

SP low limit

LL(in the corresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Setpoint LLLL=)

6

66

SP_LLM

SP_HLMSP_LLM

(no check)

SP low limit

SP high limitSP low limit

(unit HL/LL) (S7_unit of PV_IN)

Manual Value

HL(in the corresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Manual HLLL=)

6

66

MAN_HLM

(no check)

MAN_HLMMAN_LLM

Man. high limit

Man. high limitMan. low limit

LL(in the corresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Manual LLLL=)

6

6

6

MAN_LLM

MAN-HLM

MAN-LLM(no check)

Man. low limit

Man. high limit

Man. low limit

(unit HL/LL) (S7_unit of PV_IN)




Batch Batch controlEnable BA_ENOccupied OCCUPIED

BatchName BA_NAStep STEP_NO

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.2 CTRL_S: PID Step controller block

3.2.1 Description of CTRL_S


FB 76

Function

The CTRL_S controller block is a step controller for process control systems inwhich integral-action actuating elements (for example, motor-driven valves) areused. The valves are controlled by means of two binary control signals.

The operating principle of the step controller is based on a combination of the PIDalgorithm of a sampling controller and a downstream positioner. In the process thecontinuous actuating signal is converted into a sequence of control pulses.

The parameter configuration can be used to activate or de-activate partial functionsof the PID algorithm and thus adapt these to the process:

• Modes: Manual mode, automatic or tracking

• Limit monitoring of the process variable and error signal and messagegeneration via ALARM8_P block.

• Disturbance variable

• Setpoint tracking (SP=PV_IN)

• Value range setting for setpoint and process variable (physical normalization)

• Proportional, integral and derivative action, which can be activated and de-activated individually

• The proportional and derivative actions can be switched into the feedbackpath.

• Operating point setting for P-or PD controller operation

• The downstream positioner takes the following application possibilities intoconsideration:

• Controlling with position feedback signal:

• Controlling without position feedback signal:

• Direct signal adjustment by means of manual operation or interconnectedsignals

• Suppression of the actuating signals through status signals from the motor orvalve.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle

PI step controllers are common for applications. During this setting the controllerhas the following step response:

t

Impulse

ER

t0

Motor positionMTR_TM

100 %

2*GAIN*ER

GAIN*ER

te TNt

PP

titpte

P

Actuating pulse

1P0

t

Designations:

P0 Starting pulse

P Follow-up pulse

t0 Starting instant

te Duration of the starting pulse

ti Pulse duration (= PULSE_TM)

tp Pause duration (depending on the parameter configuration, does therefore notcorrespond to BREAK_TM)

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Note

The input parameter LMNR_IN is displayed in the faceplate (loop display) as theeffective manipulated variable. The position feedback is interconnected to thisparameter.

The control input LMNR_ON is used to specify whether this value is also used inthe control algorithm. If LMNR_ON=0, controlling is carried out without a positionfeedback.

Calling OBs

The watchdog interrupt OB into which the block is installed (for example OB32).Additionally in OB100 (see start-up characteristicsAnlaufverhalten).

3.2.2 Signal processing in the setpoint and process-variable branchesof CTRL_S

Setpoint generation

The setpoint SP can be obtained from three different sources which are selectedvia the inputs SP_TRK_ON and SPEXTSEL_OP in accordance with the followingtable:

SP_TRK_ON SPEXTSEL_OP SP= State

0 0 SP_OP Internal setpoint


1 Irrelevant PV_IN Tracked setpoint

Internal setpoint

Operation and control of the internal setpoint SP_OP is carried out via OP_A_LIMor OP_A_RJC (range SP_LLM - SP_HLM).

External Setpoint

The external setpoint SP_EXT can be interconnected and is limited to the range(SPEXTLLM,SPEXTHLM).

The change in the internal or external setpoint is limited to a maximum gradient(SPDRLM, SPURLM), in as far as the setpoint ramp has been activated(SPRAMPOF = 0).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Tracked setpoint

If SP_TRK_ON=1, the process variable PV_IN is used as the setpoint, whereby theerror signal ER=0 is used.

The tracked setpoint takes priority over the internal or external setpoint.

Error signal

It is formed from the effective setpoint SP and the process variable PV_IN and isavailable at the output ER after the dead band DEADB_W.

' ( $ ' % B :

( 5

6 3 � 3 9 B , 1

Error Signal Alarm

The error signal ER is monitored to alarm limits (ERL_ALM, ERH_ALM) with acommon hysteresis (ER_HYS). Display is carried out at the corresponding outputs(QERL_ALM, QERH_ALM).

Process Variable Alarm

The process variable PV_IN is monitored to the warning and alarm limits(PVL_ALM, PVL_WRN, PVH_WRN, PVH_ALM) with a common hysteresis (HYS).Display is carried out at the corresponding outputs (QPVL_ALM, QPVL_WRN,QPVH_WRN,QPVH_ALM).

Physical normalization

The error signal ER is normalized from the physical measuring range of theprocess variable (NM_PVHR, NM_PVLR) to a percentage.

100*__ PVLRNMPVHRNM

ERERNorm. −

=

Internal or external setpoint, process variable as well as the correspondingparameters are all entered in the physical measuring range of the process variable.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



The operating range of the valve is normalized to 0 to 100. Manual value, trackingvalue of the manipulated variable and disturbance variable are entered aspercentages.

The controller gain GAIN is specified in normalized (dimensionless) form.

3.2.3 Actuating signal generation of CTRL_S

The actuating signals are generated from various sources which are selected viathe control inputs in accordance with the following table:

No. Operatingmode

Internal/external

Positionfeedback

Source Remark

Effective

Depending on thesetting LMN_OFFand DISV can alsostill be effective inautomatic mode

Tracked

SP_OP is trackedif SPBUMPON=0

1 Off External - - - ENO

2 Start-up/Restart

External - Starting values Starting values Also viaCOM_RST

3 Manual /Tracked

Internal - LMNUP_OP/

LMNDN_OP

SP_OP=SP_EXT/PV_IN

MAN_OP=LMNR_IN

Actuating signaloperation

4 With MAN_OP SP_OP=SP_EXT/PV_IN

Manipulatedvariableoperation

5 External - LMNUP_OP/

LMNDN_OP

SP_OP=SP_EXT/PV_IN MAN_OP=LMNR_IN

Actuating signaloperation

6 LMNUP/LMNDN SP_OP=SP_EXT/PV_IN

MAN_OP=LMNR_IN

Direct signaladjustment

7 With MAN_OP SP_OP=SP_EXT/PV_IN

Manipulatedvariableoperation

8 LMN_TRK SP_OP=SP_EXT/PV_INMAN_OP=LMNR_IN

Tracking toexternalmanipulatedvariable

9 Automatic Internal - SP_OP MAN_OP=LMNR_IN

Setpoint of OS

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



No. Operatingmode

Internal/external

Positionfeedback

Source Remark

10 PV_IN SP_OP=PV_IN

MAN_OP=LMNR_IN

Trackedsetpoint

11 External - SP_OP MAN_OP=LMNR_IN

Setpoint of OS

12 SP_EXT SP_OP=SP_EXT

MAN_OP=LMNR_IN

Interconnectedsetpoint

13 PV_IN SP_OP=PV_IN

MAN_OP=LMNR_IN

Trackedsetpoint

Operatingprinciple

Tracking Manual Automatic

Source LMN_TRK

LMNUP /

LMNDN

MAN_OP LMNUP_OP/

LMNDN_OP

SP_EXT SP_OP PV_IN

Internal/external External

External Ext. Int. Ext. Int. Ext. Int. Ext. Int. Ext. Int.

Control inputs

AUT_L - - 0 - 0 - 1 - 1 - 1 -

AUT_ON_OP - - - 0 - 0 - 1 - 1 - 1

AUTOP_EN - - - - - - - (1) - (1) - -

MANOP_EN - - - (1) - (1) - - - - - -

LIOP_MAN_SEL - - 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

SPEXON_L - - - - - - 1 - 0 - - -

SPEXTSEL_OP - - - - - - - 1 - 0 - -

SPINT_EN - - - - - - - - - (1) - -

SPEXT_EN - - - - - - - (1) - - - -

LIOP_INT_SEL - - - - - - 1 0 1 0 - -

LMN_SEL 1 - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

LMNS_ON 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SP_OP_ON - - - - - - - - 1 1 - -

LMNOP_ON - - 1 1 - - - - - - - -

LMNSOPON - - (2) (2) 1 1 - - - - - -

LMNR_ON 1 - 1 1 - - - - - - - -

SP_TRK_ON - - - - - - 0 0 0 0 1 1

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



External: Setting is carried out program-controlled via interconnected inputs or byparameter configuration.

Internal: Setting is carried out via operator control at the OS

„-„ : Any state

1. : The setting is only checked when there is a changeover at the OS.

2. : Actuating signal operation may not be active. ( = not (LMNSOPON and(LMNUP_OP xor LMNDN_OP)) ). Operating signal operation via LMNUP_OPor LMNDN_OP has higher priority than manipulated variable operation viaMAN_OP.

The analog manipulated variable of the PID algorithm is formed as follows:

Norm.Norm. ERsLAGTM

sTV

sTNGAINLMN *

*_1

*

*

11*

+

++=

Refer to: Complex number

Disturbance variable and limitation

In automatic mode the disturbance variable DISV is added at the output of the PIDalgorithm and then the result is limited to the range LMN_LLM to LMN_HLM.

3.2.4 Manual, automatic and tracking operation of CTRL_S

Manual mode

In manual mode there are three possibilities of influencing the actuating signalsmanually:

• Manipulated variable specification via MAN_OP

• Stepping mode of MAN_OP

• Direct operation of the actuating signals via actuating commands

Operation of MAN_OP via manipulated variable specification or stepping mode isonly possible with control systems with position feedback (LMNR_ON=1).Operation and limiting is carried out by means of OP_A_LIM or OP_A_RJC (rangeMAN_HLM – MAN_LLM). The output values of QVHL and QVLL of OP_A_LIM orOP_A_RJC are transferred to the outputs QLMN_HLM and QLMN_LLM. The valueof MAN_OP is then fed to the output LMN and the motor is traveled via theactuating signals until the value of the position feedback LMNR_IN reaches thevalue of MAN_OP.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Direct operation of the actuating signals via actuating commands is, by contrastpossible at control systems with and without position feedback. Signal operation isenabled via LMNSOPON and the actuating signals are set via LMNUP_OP orLMNDN_OP. The valve is then traveled until the operation is canceled or the limitis reached.

Actual signal operation takes precedence over manipulated variable operation. IfMAN_OP is not the effective input signal, the value is tracked to LMNR_IN.

Automatic mode

The manipulated variable LMN is calculated by the PID algorithm. The controlparameters GAIN, TN, TV and TM_LAG can be interconnected.

The controller direction of control action can be reversed (rising error signal causesa falling manipulated variable) by configuring the proportional gain GAINnegatively. The proportional action can be de-activated by setting P_SEL = 0.

The integral action can be de-activated by setting TN=0. In the case of controlsystems with position feedback the integral action can be blocked for a particulardirection. This is done via INTH_POS or INTH_NEG, when the limit switchLMNR_HS or LMNR_LS is triggered or when the position feedback LMNR_IN iseffective and leaves the range LMN_HLM,LMN_LLM. In the case of controlsystems without position feedback no special anti-windup measures are required.

Operating point: It sets the operating point at the input LMN_OFF. In automaticmode this value replaces the integral action of the PID algorithm when the integralaction is de-activated. The operating point of the entered in the measuring range ofthe manipulated variable. The derivative action is designed as a delaying derivativeunit. It can be de-activated by setting TV=0.

Switching the proportional action into the feedback of the controller. IfPFDB_SEL = TRUE, the proportional action is switched to the feedback of thecontroller. A control jump thus has no influence on the proportional action. Thechangeover of PFDB_SEL is not bumpless.

Switching the derivative action into the feedback of the controller. IfDFDB_SEL = TRUE, the derivative action is switched to the feedback of thecontroller. A control jump thus has no influence on the derivative action. Thechangeover of DFDB_SEL is not bumpless.

The calculated manipulated variable is then converted into a series of positioningpulses: The algorithm for generating the positioning pulse is influenced by thefollowing parameters:

• MTR_TM: Motor actuating time. Time which is required in order to travel thevalve from end stop to end stop.

• PULSE_TM: Minimum pulse duration. The smallest step with which the valveis traveled amounts to 100%*PULSE_TM/MTR_TM.

• BREAK_TM: Minimum break time: After a positioning pulse has terminatedthis period must expire before a new pulse can be output.

• LMNR_HS, LMNR_LS: Limit switch. If one of the limit switches is set, thecorresponding output signal QLMNUP or QLMNDN is blocked.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



If the edge of the motor protection signal MSS drops, the motor protection error isset holding and passed to the output QMSS_ST. The parameter MSS_SIG is usedto specify whether only a display is carried out (MSS_SIG=0), or whether the motoris to be limited while disregarding all other inputs and system states(MSS_SIG = 1). The motor protection error (QMSS_ST = 1) is signaled to the OS.You can reset QMSS_ST at a rising edge of MSS either by operating RESET orautomatically by interconnecting L_RESET with "1".

• LMNR_ON: If LMNR_ON is used, controlling is carried out with a positionfeedback. The control input may not be changed over during active operation.

• DEADB_W: The dead band in the error signal is necessary in order to reducethe operating frequency of the controller when there are minor fluctuations ofthe error signal around the zero. In the operating point of the loop the errorsignal changes around the value "(100% *PULSE_TM/MTR_TM) * Processgain" due to a minimum pulse. The dead band should therefore be greater thanthis value. If DEADB_W has a negative value, the dead band is ignored.

Tracking mode

There are two possibilities of influencing the actuating signals in tracking mode:

Tracking via the external manipulated variable LMN_TRK

Direct operation of the actuating signals via interconnected inputs LMNS_ON,LMNUP and LMNDN

Tracking via the external manipulated variable LMN_TRK is only possible forcontrol systems with position feedback. The setting LMN_SEL=1 is used the passthe manipulated variable from the interconnected tracked value LMN_TRK to theoutput LMN. The valve is traveled across the actuating signals until the value of theposition feedback LMNR_IN reaches the value of LMN_TRK, whereby the outputsQLMN_HLM and QLMN_LLM are set to FALSE.

Tracking mode with direct operation of the actuating signals via interconnectedinputs LMNS_ON, LMNUP and LMNDN has the highest priority of all the settings. Ifonly LMNS_ON is set, the actuating signals are suppressed and the valve isstopped. The actuating signals can then only be set via the inputs LMNUP orLMNDN. However, the inputs are only effective if LMNS_ON is set simultaneously.

Cascading several PID controllers

The manipulated variable LMN of the master controller is connected to the inputSP_EXT of the follower controller. In addition it must be ensured that the mastercontroller is taken over into tracking mode operation if the cascade is interrupted.To this purpose a signal QCAS_CUT is formed in the follower controller and isinterconnected to the input LMN_SEL of the master controller. A interruption canbe caused by manual or tracking mode, by setpoint operation or manipulatedvariable tracking of the follower controller.

QCAS_CUT=LMNS_ON or LMN_SEL or (not QMAN_AUT) or (QMAN_AUT andSP_TRK_ON)

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Tracking mode with direct operation of the actuating signals via interconnectedinputs LMNS_ON, LMNUP and LMNDN has the highest priority of all the settings. Ifonly LMNS_ON is set, the actuating signals are suppressed and the valve isstopped. The actuating signals can then only be set via the inputs LMNUP orLMNDN. However, the inputs are only effective if LMNS_ON is set simultaneously.

3.2.5 Changing operating modes in CTRL_S

Operating mode selection

This can be triggered either by operator control or via interconnected inputs.


Depending on the setting of the selection input LIOP_INT_SEL the changeover iscarried out by OS operation of the input SPEXTSEL_OP or by interconnection ofSPEXON_L. The changeover at the OS has to be carried out by setting thecorresponding enable inputs SPINT_EN, SPEXT_EN.

If SPBUMPON = 1, the effective setpoint is taken over to the internal setpoint inorder to allow a bumpless changeover from external or tacking mode to internalmode.

Enabling the changeover between the internal and external setpoint

/,23B,17B6(/

63(;7B(1

63,17B(1

)$/6(

)$/6(

463,17(1

463(;7(1

�

�

�

�

QSPEXTEN = TRUE: SPEXTSEL_OP can be operated from FALSE(internal setpoint) to TRUE (external setpoint).

QSPINTEN = TRUE: SPEXTSEL_OP can be operated from TRUE(external setpoint) to FALSE (internal setpoint).

If appropriate, SPEXTSEL_OP is tracked or reset.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




63B23B21

Q_SP_OP = TRUE: SP_OP can b operated.

If appropriate, SP_OP is tracked or reset.

Manual/Automatic

Depending on the setting of the selection input LIOP_MAN_SEL the changeover iscarried out by OS operation of the input AUT_ON_OP or by interconnection ofAUT_L. The changeover at the OS has to be carried out by setting thecorresponding enable inputs MANOP_EN, AUTOP_EN.

Enabling the changeover between manual mode and automatic mode

/,23B0$1B6(/

$8723B(1

0$123B(1

)$/6(

)$/6(

40$123

4$8723

�

�

�

�

QAUTOP = TRUE: AUT_ON_OP can be operated from FALSE (manual mode) to TRUE (automatic mode).

QMANOP = TRUE: AUT_ON_OP can be operated from TRUE (automatic mode)to FALSE (manual mode).

If appropriate, AUT_ON_OP is tracked or reset.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Enabling manual mode

At the faceplate the manipulated variable operation is enabled via MAN_OP withQLMNVOP and actuating signal operation is controlled via commands withQLMNSOP:

QLMNVOP QLMNSOP

LMNOP_ON 1 -

LMNSOPON - 1

LMNR_ON 1 -

LMNSOPON and (LMNUP_OP xor LMNDN_OP) 0 -

LMN_SEL 0 0

LMNS_ON 0 0

QMAN_AUT 0 0

Special measures are taken in the modes listed below in order to ensure abumpless changeover:

• External setpoint / Setpoint tracking: At SPBUMPON = TRUE the internalsetpoint SP_OP is set equal to the effective (external or tracked) setpoint.

• Automatic mode: The manual value MAN_OP is tracked to the effectivemanipulated variable LMNR_IN.

• Tracking mode: As long as LMN_SEL is set, the manual value MAN_OP istracked to the value of LMN_TRK. You can then see to which value the valve istraveled. If LMN_SEL is canceled, MAN_OP is then reset back to the value ofLMNR_IN so that there is no changeover bump when MAN_OP is operated.

• Manual operation: In the case of control systems with position feedback theintegrator is tracked so that a bumpless changeover to automatic mode ispossible.Integrated component = Manipulated variable (as a percentage) – Proportionalcomponent – Disturbance variable (as a percentage)

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.2.6 Error handling in CTRL_S

Error handling

The following cases are handled by the block algorithm:

Operator control error

If at least one operator error occurs during the operation of one of the parametersSPEXTSEL_OP, AUT_ON_OP, SP_OP or MAN_OP, QOP_ERR = 1 is set.Otherwise QOP_ERR = 0 is set. An operator error only remains active for onecycle.

Configuration error: NM_PVHR <= NM_PVLR: The error signal ER is set to zeroand ENO=0 or QERR=1 is set.

Configuration error: SAMPLE_T<0.001: The sampling time SAMPLE_T is set to0.001 and ENO=0 or QERR=1 is set.

Configuration error: GAIN=0: The error signal ER is set to zero and ENO=0 orQERR=1 is set.

TN < SAMPLE_T/2: If TN > 0, TN = SAMPLE_T/2 is used for calculation. If TN= 0,the integrator is de-activated and the operating point LMN_OFF is active.

TV < SAMPLE_T: If TV > 0, TV = SAMPLE_T is used for calculation. If TV = 0, thedifferentiator is de-activated.

TM_LAG < SAMPLE_T/2: If TM_LAG < SAMPLE_T/2, TM_LAG < SAMPLE_T/2 isused for calculation. In these cases the differential component behaves as an idealdifferentiator.

MTR_TM, PULSE_TM and BREAK_TM are limited downwards to SAMPLE_T.

If the enable inputs *_EN are reset during active operation, this is indicated via theoutputs QMAN_ERR or QAUT_ERR.

QMAN_ERR is also set when the control input for the position feedback LMNR_ONis canceled while the controller is being tracked to LMN_TRK. In this case the valveis stopped.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.2.7 Operating, monitoring and starting up CTRL_S


For the operator the faceplate forms the window to the function block. Thefaceplate offers the user the following functions:

• Operator selection input for the faceplate

• Operation of the process / Parameter configuration with operator inputmessages

• Monitoring the process

• The faceplate can be selected in three display forms:

• Symbol

• Control field

• Loop

Commissioning

In addition to the general start-up rules you should also check the validity of thedriver function:

• Does the input driver supply the valid control variable from the correctmeasuring point in the correct units (refer to physical normalization)?

• Is the manipulated variable of the controller output via the output driver at thecorrect actuator in the correct units (refer to physical normalization)?

3.2.8 Start-up, time and message characteristics of CTRL_S


When the CPU starts up, the CTRL_S is set in manual operation mode with theinternal setpoint. For this the block must be called from the start-up OB. With CFCproject planning this is handled by CFC. With simple STEP 7 resources you willhave to enter the call in the start-up OB.After start-up, messages will be suppressed for the number of cycles configured inthe value RUNUPCYC.

During the start-up MAN_OP and LMN with LMNR_IN are initialized. The integralaction is set to zero.

Time response

The block must be called via a watchdog interrupt OB. The sampling time of theblock is entered in the parameter SAMPLE_T.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




The CTRL_S block uses the ALARM8_P block for generating messages.


• The limit monitoring functions of the process value and the system deviation,

• The CSF signal, QMSS_ST, which is referenced as a control system error byinterconnection.



The message texts of the CTRL_S block and their assignment to the blockparameters are listed in table.

Assignment of message texts and message class to the block parameters

Message No. Block parameter Default message text Messageclass

Can be suppressedby

1 QPVH_ALM(at PV_IN ≥ PVH_ALM)

Process variable too high AH M_SUP_AH,MSG_LOCK

2 QPVH_WRN(at PV_IN ≥ PVH_WRN)

Process variable high WH M_SUP_WH,MSG_LOCK

3 QPVL_WRN(at PV_IN ≤ PVL_WRN)

Process variable low WL M_SUP_WL,MSG_LOCK

4 QPVL_ALM(at PV_IN ≤ PVL_ALM)

Process variable too low AL M_SUP_AL,MSG_LOCK


6 QERH_ALM(at ER ≥ ERH_ALM)

Error signal too high AH M_SUP_ER,MSG_LOCK

7 QERL_ALM(at ER ≤ ERL_ALM)

Error signal too low AL M_SUP_ER,MSG_LOCK

8 QMSS_ST Motor protection S -

The first three of the auxiliary process values of the message block have BATCHflexible data assigned, the fourth is reserved for PV_IN and the remaining ones(AUX_PRx) can be assigned freely.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





1 BA_NA

2 STEP_NO

3 BA_ID

4 PV_IN

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist

3.2.9 Block diagram of CTRL_S

Note

In order to print out the block diagram, select landscape format as the page settingin the "Print" dialog box. The diagram is then printed on two pages, which you canjoin, if you want to.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



+

- 1

QSP_HLMQSP_LLM ER

%

phys

NM_PVHRNM_PVLR

1

0

SPRAMPOF

1

0

SPURLMSPDRLMSAMPLE_T

QUPRLMQDNRLM

DEADB_W > 0

0

1DEADB_W

QERH_ALMQERL_ALM

ERH_ALMERL_ALMER_HYS

SP

SP_TRK_ON

1

0

PV_IN

QMAN_AUT

LMN_SEL

LMNS_ON

SP_TRK_ON

QCAS_CUT

AND

OR

SPEXON_L

SPEXTSEL_OP

LIOP_INT_SEL

1

0

QSPEXTON

SPEXTHLMSPEXTLLM

QSP_HLMQSP_LLM

SP_EXT

SPBUMPON

ORSP_TRK_ON

LINK_U

V

U

U_HLU_LL

QVHLQVLL

LINK_ON

BTRACK

OP_A_LIM / OP_A_RJC

SP_HLMSP_LLM

SP

SP_OP

OP_ENSP_OP_ON

PV_IN

0

GAIN

- 1DFDB_SEL

TV > 0

+

PFDB_SEL

TN > 0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

TVSAMPLE_T

TNSAMPLE_TINT_HPOSINT_HNEG

DISV

LMN_OFF

P_SE

0

1

0

PV_IN

%

phys

NM_PVHRNM_PVLR

PVH_ALM, PVH_WRN,PVL_WRN, PVL_ALM, HYS QPVH_ALM

QPVH_WRNQPVL_WRNQPVL ALM

MAN_OP

MAN_HLMMAN_LLM

1

LMNR_IN

LMNOP_ON

QLMN_HLMQLMN_LLM

LINK_U

V

U

U_HLU_LL

QVHLQVLL

LINK_ON

BTRACK

OP_A_LIM / OP_A_RJC

1

0

ANDLMN_SEL

LMNS_ON

LMNR_ON

LMN_TRK

OP_EN

QMAN_AUT

LMNSOPON AND(LMNUP_OP XORLMNDN_OP)

ORLMN_SEL

LMNS_ON

LMNR_ON

1

0

AUT_L

AUT_OP_ON

LIOP_MAN_SEL

1

0

LMNS_ON

LMNUPLMNDN

LMNR_IN

1

0

LMNS_ON

QMAN_AUT

LMN_SEL OR

LMN_HLMLMN_LLM

LMN

+

QLMN_HLMQLMN_LLM

- 1LMNUP_OP

LMNDN_OP

1

0

LMNS_ON

QMAN_AUT

LMN_SEL

LMNSOPON

AND

MTR_TMPULSE_TMSAMPLE_T

CTRL_S with position feedback

QLMNDN

QLMNUP

PULSE_TMBREAK_TMSAMPLE_T

AND

LMNR_HS

LMNR_LS

AND

AND

AND

QMSS_ST

OR

MSS_SIGMSS

AND

ANDRESETOR

L_RESET

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



+

- 1

1

0

SPRAMPOF

1

0

SPURLMSPDRLMSAMPLE_T

QUPRLMQDNRLM

PVH_ALM, PVH_WRN,PVL_WRN, PVL_ALM, HYS QPVH_ALM

QPVH_WRNQPVL_WRNQPVL ALM

PV_IN

ER

%

phys

NM_PVHRNM_PVLR

DEADB_W > 0

0

1DEADB_W

QERH_ALMQERL_ALM

ERH_ALMERL_ALMER_HYS

SP

SP_TRK_ON

1

0

PV_IN

LMNR_SIM

SPEXON_L

SPEXTSEL_OP

LIOP_INT_SEL

1

0

QSPEXTON

QSP_HLMQSP_LLM

SPEXTHLMSPEXTLLM

QSP_HLMQSP_LLM

SP_EXT

SPBUMPON

ORSP_TRK_ON

LINK_U

V

U

U_HLU_LL

QVHLQVLL

LINK_ON

BTRACK

OP_A_LIM / OP_A_RJC

SP_HLMSP_LLM

SP

SP_OP

OP_ENSP_OP_ON

PV_IN

%phys

NM_PVHRNM_PVLR

QLMNDN

QLMNUP

PULSE_TMBREAK_TMSAMPLE_T

AND

LMNR_HS

LMNR_LS

AND

AND

AND1

0

LMNS_ON

LMNUPLMNDN

LMNUP_OPLMNDN_OP

1

0

LMNS_ON

LMN_SEL

LMNSOPON

AND

MTR_TMPULSE_TMSAMPLE_T

CTRL_S without position feedback

1001

0

0

0

- 1001

0

+

0

OR

0

1

+

- 1

0

GAIN

- 1 DFDB_SEL

TV > 0

+

PFDB_SEL

1

0

1

0

1

0

TVSAMPLE_T

DISV

P_SE

0

1

0

SAMPLE_T / TN

+

SAMPLE_T/MTR_TM

0

1

LMNRSONLMN_HLM-LMN_HLM

0

QMAN_AUT

1

0

AUT_L

AUT_OP_ON

LIOP_MAN_SEL

LMN_SEL

LMNS_ON

SP_TRK_ON

QCAS_CUT

AND

OR

QMSS_ST

OR

MSS_SIGMSS

AND

ANDRESETOR

L_RESET

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.2.10 Connections of CTRL_S


Meaning Datatype

Initial I/O Attr. OC&M Valid values

AUT_L LINKABLE INPUT FORMANUAL/AUTO MODE

Interconnectable input forMANUAL/AUTO: MANUAL, 1:AUTO

BOOL 0 I Q

AUT_ON_OP OPERATOR INPUT MODE1=AUTO, 0= MANUAL

BOOL 0 IO B +

AUTOP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT AUTO

BOOL 1 I Q

AUX_PRx AUXILIARY VALUE x ANY 0 IO Q



BA_NA BATCH NAME STRING[16]

’’ I Q +

BREAK_TM Minimum Break Time [s] REAL 1 I +

CSF CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT BOOL 0 I Q

DEADB_W DEADBAND WIDTH REAL 0 I + ≥ 0

DFDB_SEL DERIVATIVE ACTION INFEEDBACK PATH (1:ACTIVE)

BOOL 0 I Q

DISV DISTURBANCE VARIABLE REAL 0 I Q

EXT CONTROL DIFFERENCE

Error signal

REAL 0 O +

ER_HYS HYSTERESIS OF ERRORSIGNAL

REAL 0.1 I + ≥ 0

ERH_ALM ER: HH ALARM

Error signal: Upper alarm limit

REAL 100 I + > 0

ERL_ALM ER: LL ALARM

Error signal: Lower alarm limit

REAL -100 I + < 0

GAIN PROPORTIONAL GAIN REAL 1 I +

HYS HYSTERESIS OF PROCESSVARIABLE

REAL 5 I + ≥0

INT_HNEG Integral Action Hold inNegative Direction

BOOL 0 I

INT_HPOS Integral Action Hold in PositiveDirection

BOOL 0 I

L_RESET Linkable Input RESET

Interconnectable input RESETfor motor protection error(QMSS_ST=0)

BOOL 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


LIOP_INT_SEL

SELECT:1=LINKING ,0=OPERATION

1: Interconnection active0: Operator control active

BOOL 0 I Q

LIOP_MAN_SEL

SELECT: 1=LINKING,0=OPERATOR ACTIVE

1: Interconnection active0: Operator control active

BOOL 0 I Q

LMN MANIPULATED VALUE REAL 0 O

LMN_HLM HIGH LIMIT VALUE FORMANIPULATED VARIABLE

REAL 100 I Q + LMN_HLM >LMN_LLM

LMN_LLM LOW LIMIT VALUE FORMANIPULATED VARIABLE

REAL 0 I Q + LMN_LLM <LMN_HLM

LMN_OFF MANIPULATED VARIABLEOFFSET

Linearization point

REAL 0 I Q +

LMN_SEL SELECT EXTERNALTRACKING VALUE 1=ACTIVE

BOOL 0 I Q

LMN_TRK EXTERNAL TRACKINGVALUE

REAL 0 I Q

LMNDN Manipulated Signal Down BOOL 0 I

LMNDN_OP Manipulated Signal DownOperation

BOOL 0 I +

LMNOP_ON ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT MAN_OP

BOOL 1 I Q

LMNR_HS High limit signal of repeatedmanipulated value

BOOL 0 I

LMNR_IN FEEDBACK OF PROCESSMANIPULATED VALUE FOROS

REAL 0 I Q

LMNR_LS Low limit signal of repeatedmanipulated value

BOOL 0 I

LMNR_ON Repeated Manipulated ValueActive

BOOL 0 I

LMNR_SIM Repeated Manipulated ValueSimulated

REAL 0 O +

LMNRSON Simulation of the RepeatedManipulated Value On

BOOL 0 I +

LMNS_ON Manipulated Signals On BOOL 0 I

LMNSOPON Enable: 1=Operator May InputSignals

BOOL 1 I

LMNUP Manipulated Signal Up BOOL 0 I

LMNUP_OP Manipulated Signal UpOperation

BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_AH 1=SUPPRESS PV HH ALARM

1: Message suppressionupper alarm process variable

BOOL 0 I +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


M_SUP_AL 1=SUPPRESS PV LL ALARM

1: Message suppressionlower alarm process variable

BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_ER SUPPRESS ER ALARMS BOOL 1 I +

M_SUP_WH 1=SUPPRESS PV H ALARM(WARNING)

1: Message suppression upperalarm process variable

BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_WL 1=SUPPRESS PV L ALARM(WARNING)

1: Message suppression loweralarm process variable

BOOL 0 I +

MAN_HLM HIGH LIMIT MANUAL VALUEFOR MANIPULATEDVARIABLE

REAL 100 I +

MAN_LLM LOW LIMIT MANUAL VALUEFOR MANIPULATEDVARIABLE

REAL 0 I +

MAN_OP OPERATOR INPUT FORCONTROL OUTPUT VALUE

REAL 0 IO B +

MANOP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT MANUAL

BOOL 1 I Q

MO_PVHR HIGH LIMIT BAR RANGE

Upper display limit (measuringrange)

REAL 110 I +

MO_PVLR LOW LIMIT BAR RANGE

Lower display limit (measuringrange)

REAL -10 I +

MSG_ACK MESSAGE ACKNOWLEDGE WORD 0 O

MSG_EVID MESSAGE EVENT ID DWORD 0 I M

MSG_LOCK ENABLE 1=MESSAGESLOCKED

1 : Process-state-specificmessage suppression

BOOL 0 I Q +

MSG_STAT MESSAGE 1: STATUS Output WORD 0 O

MSS Motor Protecting Switch:0=Active

BOOL 1 I

MSS_SIG 1=In Case of MSS-Fault: MotorOFF

BOOL 0 I

MTR_TM Motor Manipulated Value [s] REAL 60 I +

NM_PVHR PV NORMALIZING RANGEHIGH LIMIT

REAL 100 I

NM_PVLR PV NORMALIZING RANGELOWLIMIT

REAL 0 I



21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


P_SEL PROPORTIONAL SELECTION(1: ACTIVE)

BOOL 1 I Q

PFDB_SEL PROPORTIONAL ACTION INFEEDBACK PATH (1:ACTIVE)

BOOL 0 I Q

PULSE_TM Minimum Pulse Time [s] REAL 1 I +

PV_IN PROCESS VALUE(to AUX_PR04 of Message1)

REAL 0 IO QE +

PVH_ALM PV: H ALARM

Process variable: Upper alarmlimit

REAL 100 I + PVH_ALM ≥PVL_ALM

PVH_WRN PV: H ALARM (WARNING)

Process variable: Upperwarning limit

REAL 95 I + PVH_WRN ≥PVL_WRN

PVL_ALM PV: LL ALARM

Process variable: Lower alarmlimit

REAL 0 I + PVL_ALM ≤PVH_ALM

PVL_WRN PV: L ALARM (WARNING)

Process variable: Lowerwarning limit

REAL 5 I + PVL_WRN≤PVH_WRN

Q_SP_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR MAYENTER SETPOINT

BOOL 0 O +

QAUT_ERR Missing Enable Inputs forAutomatic Mode

BOOL 0 O

QAUTOP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "AUTO"

BOOL 0 O +

QCAS_CUT 1= CASCADE CONNECTIONCUT

BOOL 1 O Q

QDNRLM 1=SETPOINT NEG. RAMPRATELIMIT ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QERH_ALM ERROR SIGNAL, 1: HHALARMACTIVE

BOOL 0 O +

QERL_ALM ERROR SIGNAL,1: LL ALARM ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O +

QERR 1=ERROR

1: (inverted value of ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QLMN_HLM 1=HIGH LIMIT OFMANIPULATEDVALUE ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QLMN_LLM 1=LOW LIMIT OFMANIPULATEDVALUE ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QLMN_SEL 1= LMN_SEL ACTIVE BOOL 0 O +

QLMNDN Manipulated Signal Down BOOL 0 O +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


QLMNOP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLE FOR "VALUEOPERATION"

BOOL 0 O +

QLMNR_HS High Limit Signal of RepeatedManipulated Value

BOOL 0 O +

QLMNR_LS Low Limit Signal of RepeatedManipulated Value

BOOL 0 O +

QLMNR_ON Repeated Manipulated ValueOn

BOOL 0 O +

QLMNRSON Simulation of the RepeatedManipulated Value On

BOOL 0 O +

QLMNS_ON 1= LMNS_ON ACTIVE BOOL 0 O +

QLMNSOP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLE FOR "SIGNALOPERATION"

BOOL 1 O +

QLMNUP Manipulated Signal Up BOOL 0 O +

QLMNVOP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLE FOR VALUEOPERATION

BOOL 1 O +

QMAN_AUT 1=AUTO, 0=MANUAL MODE BOOL 0 O +

QMAN_ERR Missing Enable Inputs forManualMode

BOOL 0 O

QMANOP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLE FOR "MANUAL"MODE

BOOL 0 O +

QMAN_ERR ALARM_8P: Error Output BOOL 0 O

QMSG_SUP 1=MESSAGE SUPPRESSIONACTIVE

BOOL 0 O +

QMSS_ST 1=Unacknowledged MotorProtective Switch

Motor protective switch active(0: Reset with RESET)

BOOL 0 O +


QPVH_ALM 1=HH ALARM ACTIVE BOOL 0 O

QPVH_WRN 1=H ALARM ACTIVE(WARNING)

BOOL 0 O

QPVL_ALM 1=LL ALARM ACTIVE BOOL 0 O

QPVL_WRN 1=L ALARM ACTIVE(WARNING)

BOOL 0 O

QSP_HLM 1=SETPOINT OUTPUT HIGHLIMIT ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QSP_LLM 1=SETPOINT OUTPUT LOWLIMIT ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QSPEXTEN STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "EXTERNAL"

BOOL 0 O +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype



BOOL 0 O +

QSPINTEN STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "INTERNAL"

BOOL 0 O +

QUPRLM 1=SETPOINT POSITIVERAMP RATE LIMIT ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

RESET Operator Input Error Reset

Operable reset input for Motorprotection error (QMSS_ST=0)

BOOL 0 IO B +

RUNUPCYC LAG: NUMBER OF RUN UPCYCLES

INT 3 I

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [s] REAL 1 I ≥0.001

SP ACTIVE SETPOINT REAL 0 O E +


SP_HLM SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT REAL 100 I + SP_HLM >SP_LLM

SP_LLM SETPOINT LOW LIMIT REAL 0 I + SP_LLM <SP_HLM

SP_OP OPERATOR INPUTSETPOINT

REAL 0 IO B +

SP_OP_ON ENABLE 1=OPERATOR FORSETPOINT INPUT

BOOL 1 I Q

SP_TRK_ON 1=LET SP_OP EQUAL PV_IN

1: Track setpoint SP_OP

BOOL 0 I +

SPBUMPON ENABLE 1=BUMPLESS FORSETPOINT ON

BOOL 1 I +

SPDRLM MAX. NEGATIVE RAMP RATELIMIT FOR SETPOINT [1/S]

REAL 100 I +

SPEXON_L LINKABLE INPUT TO SELECTSP_EXT

Interconnectable input forinternal (0) / external (1)

BOOL 0 I Q

SPEXT_EN ENABLE:1=OPERATOR FOR"EXTERNAL" SETPOINTSOURCE SELECTION

BOOL 1 I Q

SPEXTHLM HIGH LIMIT VALUE FORSP_EXT VARIABLE


SPEXTLLM LOW LIMIT VALUE FORSP_EXT VAR


SPEXTSEL_OP

OPERATOR INPUT TOSELECTSP_EXT

BOOL 0 IO B +

SPINT_EN ENABLE:1=OPERATOR FOR"INTERNAL" SETPOINTSOURCE SELECTION

BOOL 1 I Q

SPRAMPOF 1=ASCENT LIMIT FORSETPOINT OFF

BOOL 1 I +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


SPURLM POSITIVE RAMP RATE LIMITOF SETPOINT CHANGE [1/S]

REAL 100 I +


TM_LAG LAG TIME CONSTANT [S]

Time Lag of the DerivativeAction in [s]

REAL 1 I + ≥SAMPLE_T/2

TN RESET TIME [s] REAL 10 I + TN=0,≥SAMPLE_T/2

TV DIFFERENTIAL TIME [s] REAL 0 I + TV=0,≥SAMPLE_T

For explanations and meaning of the abbreviations please refer to: Generalinformation on the block description

3.2.11 Operator control and monitoring of CTRL_S




Operator text in thelog

Default Setpoint value (as abar)

(in the correspondinginput dialog box:

HL=SetpointLL=)

5

SP

SP_HLM

SP_OP

SP_LLM

Setpoint

(upper value) MO_PVHR(lower value) MO_PVLR

Process variable (as abar)

PV_IN

(bar at extreme right)(red= upper alarmvalue)

PVH_ALM

(red= lower alarmvalue)

PVL_ALM

(yellow= upperwarning value)

PVH_WRN

(yellow= lowerwarning value)

PVL_WRN

Mode

(selection list:Manual/Automatic)

5 QMAN_AUT

AUT_ON_OP =0/1 Mode=Manual/Auto

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






Effective sources:Signal externalSignal internalManipulated variable

externalManipulated variable

internalSetpoint externalSetpoint internalProcess variable

Is set depending onthe control parameters

Setpoint


HL=SetpointLL=)

5

SP

SP_HLM

SP_OP

SP_LLM

Setpoint

Process variable PV_IN(unitsetpoint/processvariable)

(S7_shortcut ofPV_IN)

Manual


HL=Manual

LL=)

5

5

MAN_OP

MAN_HLM

MAN_OPMAN_LLM

Manual


HL=Manual

LL=)

MAN_HLMMAN_OP

MAN_LLM

Manual

Command

Open 5 LMNUP_OP=1

LMNDN_OP=0

Open

Stop 5 LMNUP_OP=0

LMNDN_OP=0

Stop

Close 5 LMNUP_OP=0

LMNDN_OP=1

Close

Manipulated variable LMNR_IN

(unitmanual/manipulatedvariable)

(S7_shortcut ofMAN_OP)

(symbol bell)

(symbol belldeactivated)

QMSG_SUP

MSG_LOCK


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






Manual (as pointer)

Manipulated variable(as a horizontal bar)






QSPEXTON

SPEXTSEL_OP=0/1

Internal/External

Setpoint processingBumpless ext->in 6 SPBUMPON =0/1 SP bumpless off/onTrackedmanipulatedvariable=Processvariable

6 SP_TRK_ON =0/1 Track off/on

Without ramp 6 SPRAMPOF =0/1 Ascent limit on/offError signal monitoring

Suppress message 6 M_SUP_ER =0/1 Suppress ER=No/YesUpper limit 6 ERH_ALM ER:HH alarmLower limit 6 ERL_ALM ER:LL alarmHysteresis 6 ER_HYS ER_HysteresisUpper limitexceeded

QERH_ALM

Lower limitexceeded

QERL_ALM

Error signal EXT

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






Parameter Control parametersKP 6 GAIN GainTN s (=in sec) 6 TN TNTV s 6 TV TV

ParameterDead band 6 DEADB_W Dead bandHysteresis(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=HysLL=)

6

6

HYS

(no check)

HYS

0,0

Hysteresis

Hysteresis

(unit deadband/hysteresis)

(S7_shortcut ofPV_IN)

Lag time s 6 TM_LAG Lag time

Setpoint rampRise s (=per sec) 6 SPURLM Pos. ramp rateDrop /s 6 SPDRLM Neg. ramp rate(unit rise/drop) (S7_shortcut of

PV_IN)

Setpoint/Processvariable bar

HL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=bar HLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_PVHR

(no check)

MO_PVHR

MO_PVLRLL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=bar LLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_PVLR

MO_PVHR

MO_PVLR

(no check)(unit HL/LL) (S7_shortcut of

PV_IN)

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Parameters of the ASblock


Limits (blue= Display of thesetpoint limit)

(upper value) SP_HLM(lower value) SP_LLM

(yellow bars = warning)(upper value) PVH_WRN(lower value) PVL_WRN

(red bars = alarm)(upper value) PVH_ALM(lower value) PVL_ALM

AlarmAOact (=active)

6

6

PVH_ALM

M_SUP_AH =0/1

PV:HH alarm

Suppress HH= No/YesWHact

6

6

PVH_WRN

M_SUP_WH =0/1

PV:H alarm

Suppress H= No/YesWLact

6

6

PVL_WRN

M_SUP_AL =0/1

PV:L alarm

Suppress LL= No/Yes

ALact

6

6

PVL_ALM

M_SUP_WL =0/1

PV:LL alarm

Suppress L= No/Yes

SetpointHL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Setpoint HLLL=)

6

SP_HLM

(no check)

SP_HLM

SP_LLM

SP high limit

LL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Setpoint LLLL=)

6

SP_LLM

SP_HLM

SP_LLM

(no check)

SP low limit

(unit HL/LL) (S7_shortcut ofPV_IN)

Manual ValueHL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Manual HLLL=)

6

MAN_HLM

(no check)

MAN_HLM

MAN_LLM

Man. high limit

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001







HL=Manual LLLL=)

6

MAN_LLM

MAN-HLM

MAN-LLM

(no check)

Man. low limit

(unit HL/LL) (S7_shortcut ofMAN_OP)









Standard S MotorMinimum pulse 6 PULSE_TM Pulse timeMinimum pause 6 BREAK_TM Break timeRuntime 6 MTR_TM MTR time

Motor protectionactive QMSSreset 5 RESET=1 Error=Reset

Open limit reached QLMNR_HS

Close limit reached QLMNR_LS

Actuating signal open QLMNUP

Actuating signal close QLMNDN

With feedback QLMNR_ON

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.3 DIG_MON: Digital value monitoring

3.3.1 Description of DIG_MON


FB 62

Function

The block is used to observe a digital measuring point with chatter suppression.Both the signal state and the state of the control system (external control systemfaults, channel faults) belong to the measuring point. The parameter MSG_CLAScan be used to determine with which message class the measuring point issignaled.

Operating principle

The digital value at input I is monitored for changes. A timer is started afresh witheach edge of the input signal. Once the waiting time configured under SUPPTIMEhas elapsed, input value I is passed on to output Q.This ensures that only those signals which are present for at least the timespecified under SUPPTIME will be passed on to the output. Signals which changemore quickly than this will not be passed on.When SUPPTIME < SAMPLE_T, input value I is passed on to output Q.

Calling OBs


Error handling

In the event of invalid parameterization of the message class (see Signalingcharacteristics) QERR=1, and no message will be sent.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




When the CPU starts up, the old initial value Q is retained. Monitoring starts againfor changes occurring after the start-up. For this the block must be called from thestart-up OB. With CFC project planning this is handled by CFC. With simpleSTEP 7 resources you will have to enter the call in the start-up OB.After start-up, messages will be suppressed for the number of cycles configured inthe value RUNUPCYC.

Time response

The block must be called via a watchdog interrupt OB. The sampling timeAbtastzeitof the block is entered in the parameter SAMPLE_T.


The DIG_MON block uses the ALARM8_P block for generating messages.


• A change in the output signal Q


The process messages (not process control messages!) can be locked withMSG_LOCK.


Message classes

By configuring the input MSG_CLAS (refer to table) the change in the output Q canbe signaled with a selectable message class to the OS. You can assign thefollowing message classes to the message:

Assignment of message texts and message classes to the block parameters


Can be suppressed by

1 Q AND MSG_CLAS = 1 ALARM HIGH AH MSG_LOCK

2 Q AND MSG_CLAS = 2 WARNING HIGH WH MSG_LOCK

3 Q AND MSG_CLAS = 3 TOLERANCE HIGH TH MSG_LOCK

4 Q AND MSG_CLAS = 4 TOLERANCE LOW TL MSG_LOCK

5 Q AND MSG_CLAS = 5 WARNING LOW WL MSG_LOCK

6 Q AND MSG_CLAS = 6 ALARM LOW AL MSG_LOCK

7 Q AND MSG_CLAS = 7 OPERATION REQUEST OR MSG_LOCK

8 CSF EXTERNAL ERROR S -

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



The first three of the auxiliary process values of the message block have BATCHflexible data assigned and the remaining ones (AUX_PRx) can be assigned freely.



1 BA_NA

2 STEP_NO

3 BA_ID

4 AUX_PR04

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist

3.3.2 Connections of DIG_MON


Meaning Data type Initial I/O Attr. OC&M Validvalues

AUX_PRx AUXILIARY VALUE X ANY 0 IO Q


BA_ID BATCH ID DWORD 0 I Q +

BA_NA BATCH NAME STRING [16] 0 I Q +

CSF CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT1=EXTERNAL ERROR

BOOL 0 I Q

I INPUT SIGNAL BOOL 0 I Q +


MSG_CLAS MESSAGE CLASS OF SIGNAL INT 0 I 0 - 7

MSG_EVID MESSAGE ID

ALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O M +

MSG_LOCK ENABLE1=MESSAGES LOCKED

1= Process-state-specificmessage suppression

BOOL 0 I Q +


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






Q OUTPUT BOOL 0 O +

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted value of ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QMSG_ERR

1=MESSAGE ERROR

1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +


BOOL 0 O +


INT 3 I

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [S] REAL 1.0 I >0STEP_NO BATCH STEP NUMBER WORD 0 IQ Q +

SUPPTIME SUPPRESS TIME [S]

Time in [s], which has to passbefore an edge change at theinput is passed on to the output.

REAL 0 I +


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.3.3 Operator control and monitoring of DIG_MON





Default Input I

Output Q

Time lag s (=in sec)


HL=DelayLL=)

6

SUPPTIME

(no check)

SUPPTIME

0,0

Suppress time

(symbol bell)


QMSG_SUP

MSG_LOCK







21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.4 MEAS_MON: Measured value monitoring

3.4.1 Description of MEAS_MON


FB 65

Function

The block is used to monitor a measured value (analog signal) with regard to thelimit pairs

• Warning limit (upper/lower) and

• Alarm limit (upper/lower)

Operating principle

The block monitors the measured value connected to input U. The upper or lowertransgression of a limit is indicated at a corresponding output and signaled ifapplicable (see message characteristics Message characteristics).

Calling OBs

In the same OB with and after the block whose measured value is to be monitored.Additionally in OB100 (see start-up characteristics).

Error handling

In the event of arithmetical errors the outputs ENO=0 and QERR=1 will be set.


After start-up messages will be suppressed for the number of cycles configured inthe value RUNUPCYC.

Time response

No time response. The block is to run in the same runtime group (see CFC) withthe measured value supplier.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




The MEAS_MON block uses the ALARM8_P block to generate messages.


• The limit monitoring functions of the measured value





Message No. Block parameter Default message text Message class Can be suppressed by

1 QH_ALM TOO HIGH AH M_SUP_AH, MSG_LOCK2 QH_WRN HIGH WH M_SUP_WH,

MSG_LOCK3 QL_WRN LOW WL M_SUP_WL, MSG_LOCK4 QL_ALM TOO LOW AL M_SUP_AL, MSG_LOCK5 CSF EXTERNAL ERROR S -

The first three of the auxiliary process values of the message block have BATCHflexible data assigned, the fourth is reserved for U and the remaining ones(AUX_PRx) can be assigned freely.



1 BA_NA2 STEP_NO3 BA_ID4 U5 AUX_PR056 AUX_PR067 AUX_PR078 AUX_PR089 AUX_PR0910 AUX_PR10


Does not exist.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.4.2 Connections of MEAS_MON



AUX_PRx Auxiliary Value x ANY 0 IO Q

BA_EN Batch Enable BOOL 0 I Q +

BA_ID Batch ID DWORD 0 IO Q +

BA_NA Batch Name STRING[16] 0 I Q +

CSF Control System Fault1=External Error

BOOL 0 I Q

HYS Hysteresis of Analog Input REAL 5 I + ≥ 0

M_SUP_AH 1=Suppress HH Alarm BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_AL 1=Suppress LL Alarm BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_WH 1=Suppress H Alarm(Warning)

BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_WL 1=Suppress L Alarm(Warning)

BOOL 0 I +

MO_PVHR High limit bar range

Upper display limit(measuring range) - only forOS

REAL 110 I +

MO_PVLR Low limit bar range

Lower display limit(measuring range) - only forOS

REAL -10 I +

MSG_ACK Message acknowledged WORD 0 O

MSG_EVID MESSAGE ID

ALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O +

MSG_LOCK Enable 1=Messages locked

1=Process messagesdisabled

BOOL 0 I Q +

MSG_STAT MESSAGE 1: STATUSOutput

WORD 0 O

OCCUPIED Occupied by Batch BOOL 0 I Q +

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QH_ALM 1=HH-alarm Active BOOL 0 O

QH_WRN 1=H Alarm active (Warning) BOOL 0 O

QL_ALM 1=LL Alarm Active BOOL 0 O

QL_WRN 1=L Alarm Active (Warning) BOOL 0 O

QMSG_ERR 1=MESSAGE ERROR

1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +

QMSG_SUP 1=Message SuppressionActive

BOOL 0 O +

RUNUPCYC Lag: Number ofRun Up Cycles

INT 3 I

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





STEP_NO Batch Step Number WORD 0 IO Q +

U Analog Input (MeasuredValue)

REAL 0 I QE +

U_AH HH Alarm Limit REAL 100 I + U_AH>U_WH

U_AL LL Alarm Limit REAL 0 I + U_AL<U_WL

U_WH H Alarm Limit (Warning) REAL 95 I + U_AH>U_WH> U_WL

U_WL L Alarm Limit (Warning) REAL 5 I + U_WH>U_WL> U_AL


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.4.3 Operator control and monitoring of MEAS_MON





Default Process variable (as abar)

U


(bar at right)(red= upper alarmvalue)

U_AH

(red= lower alarmvalue)

U_AL


U_WH

(yellow= lowerwarning value)

U_WL

Message suppression MSG_LOCK

Process variable = U

E1 (S7_shortcut of U)

Hysteresis(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=HysLL=)

6

6

HYS

(no check)

HYS

0,0

Hysteresis

Hysteresis

(symbol bell) QMSG_SUP





Limits (Scale HL) MO_PVHR

(Scale LL) MO_PVLR

(red bar = alarm)(upper value) U_AH(lower value) U_AL

(yellow bar = warning)(upper value) U_WH(lower value) U_WL

SignalingAOact (=active)

6

U_AH

M_SUP_AH =0/1

HH alarm

Suppress HH= No/Yes

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






WHact

6

U_WH

M_SUP_WH =0/1

H alarm

Suppress H= No/YesWLact

6 M_SUP_WL =0/1

L alarm

Suppress L= No/YesALact

6

U_AL

M_SUP_AL =0/1

LL alarm

Suppress LL= No/Yes

BarHL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=HLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_PVHR

(no check)

MO_PVHR

MO_PVLRLL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=LLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_PVLR

MO_PVHR

MO_PVLR

(no check)

Display

Output/Input field Operator

authorization Parameters of theAS block




21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.5 RATIO_P: Ratio control

3.5.1 Description of RATIO_P


FB 70

Function

The block is used to create a ratio e.g. in a ratio control. It is also used as apercentage adjuster (for example, speed ratio control), or to influence the referenceinput variable of a cascade.

Operating principle

The RATIO_P block operates in accordance with the equation: V = U1 * U2 +BIASU1 is derived by interconnection while U2 is selected dependent on theinternal/external operating mode.

Internal/External changeover

The operating mode is selected by the following measures and indicated at theoutput QIN_EX:

• Operation of the input IN_EX, when L_IE_ON=0 and the enables IN_OP_ENand EX_OP_EN are valid.

• Interconnection of L_IN_EX, if L_IE_ON=1.

Internal: The parameter U2 in the formula is specified by operator control and,after limiting to (U2_LL, U2_HL), incorporated in the formula. Operator enablementU2_OP_EN must be present.

External: The parameter U2 is specified by interconnecting the input U2_EXT and,after limiting to (U2_LL, U2_HL), incorporated in the formula. The controllable inputU2 is tracked to U2_EXT in order to enable smooth changeover to "internal".

Calling OBs

Installation is carried out in the OB containing the block which uses the result. TheRATIO_P must be positioned before first (first calculate, then use).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Error handling

Arithmetic error are indicated by ENO=0 or QERR=1.Operator errors are displayed as a group at output QOP_ERR.


No special measures.

Time response

If the result for the blocks with time characteristics is relevant (for example, ratiocontrol, synchro control), the block should be installed in the same OB and beforeit.


Does not exist.


Does not exist

3.5.2 Connections of RATIO_P



BIAS BIAS

Share by which V is moved

REAL 0 I Q +

EX_OP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUTEXTERNAL

BOOL 0 I Q +

IN_EX OPERATOR INPUT:1=EXTERNAL,0=INTERNAL

BOOL 0 IO B +

IN_OP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUTINTERNAL

BOOL 0 I Q +

L_IE_ON SELECT: 1=LINKING ,0=OPERATORACTIVE

1= Interconnection active,0= Operator active

BOOL 0 I Q +

L_IN_EX LINKABLE SELECT:1=EXT., 0=INT. MODE

Interconnectable input for IN_EX

BOOL 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





MO_U1HR HIGH LIMIT BAR RANGE REAL 110 I +

MO_U1LR LOW LIMIT BAR RANGE REAL -10 I +

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QIE_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLE FOR"INTERNAL/EXTERNAL"

BOOL 0 O +

QIN_EX 1=EXTERNAL, 0=INTERNALMODE

BOOL 0 O +

QOP_ERR 1=OPERATOR ERROR BOOL 0 O +

QU2_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLE FOR "U2" OPERATION

BOOL 0 O +

QVHL 1=HIGH LIMIT OF V ACTIVE BOOL 0 O +

QVLL 1=LOW LIMIT OF V ACTIVE BOOL 0 O +

U1 INPUT 1 REAL 0 I Q +

U2 OPERATOR INPUT: INTERNALFACTOR

REAL 1 IO B +

U2_EXT EXTERNAL FACTOR REAL 1 I Q +

U2_HL HIGH LIMIT U2 REAL 1 I +

U2_LL LOW LIMIT U2 REAL 0 I +

U2_OP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR FOR"U2" INPUT

BOOL 1 I Q

V ANALOG OUTPUT REAL 0 O +

V_HL HIGH LIMIT OUTPUT VALUE REAL 100 I + V_HL>V_LL

V_LL LOW LIMIT OUTPUT VALUE REAL 0 I + V_LL<V_HL


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.5.3 Operator control and monitoring of RATIO_P





Default U1 (as a bar)

Mode


QIN_EX

IN_EX =0/1 Internal/External

U1

U2


HLU2

LL)

6

6

U2

U2_HL

U2

U2_LL

U2

High limit U2

U2

Low limit U2

BIAS BIAS

V V

> Upper limit QVHL

< Lower limit QVLL

(Scale horizontal)

V (as a horizontal bar)




Limits U1HL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=U1_OGLL=)

6

6

6

MO_U1HR

(no check)

MO_U1HR

MO_U1LR


HL=U1_UGLL=)

6

6

6

MO_U1LR

MO_U1HR

MO_U1LR

(no check)

V

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001







HL=V_OGLL=)

6

6

6

V_HL

(no check)

V_HL

V_LL

High limit V

High limit V

Low limit V


HL=V_UGLL=)

6

6

6

V_LL

V_HL

V_LL

(no check)

Low limit V

High limit V

Low limit V

U2HL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=U2_OGLL=)

6

6

6

U2-HL

(no check)

U2-HL

U2_LL

High limit U2

High limit U2

Low limit U2


HL=U2_UGLL=)

6

6

6

U2_LL

U2-HL

U2_LL

(no check)

Low limit U2

High limit U2

Low limit U2

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.6 FMCS_PID: Controller block

3.6.1 Description of FMCS_PID


FB 114

Area of Application

The block "FMCS_PID" is used to interface the FM355 controller block.

It can be used for the C (continuous-action controllers) and S (step-actioncontrollers) module types. It does not in itself contain any control algorithms, sincethe control functions are carried out exclusively on the module. It can be used tomonitor all the relevant process variables and to change all the relevant controllerparameters. Application examples of the FM355 and detailed descriptions of theinput and output parameters can be found in the manual of the controller moduleFM355.

Use of the controller module as a continuous-action controller

The block provides the following displays and offers the following setting options:

• Display of the result of the limit monitoring carried out on the module for twolimit pairs for the process variable PV or the error signal ER (QH_ALM,QH_WRN, QL_WRN, QL_ALM outputs). MONERSEL is used to specifywhether PV or ER is monitored.

• De-activation of the generation of individual messages when limits areexceeded

• Split-range function

• Dead band (DEADB_W, on threshold) in the error-signal branch

• Specification of the control algorithm: PID algorithm (QFUZZY = 0) or FUZZYalgorithm (QFUZZY = 1)

• Manipulated variable tracking

• Deactivation of the integral action

• Setpoint tracking (SP = PV)

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Use of the controller module as a pulse controller

The same points apply as for that of the continuous-action controller, except thatsplit-range control is not possible.

Use of the controller module as a step-action controller

As for a continuous-action controller with the following differences:

• Output QLMNR_ON displays whether there is a repeated manipulated variable(1: exists, 0: does not exist).

• Split-range control is not possible.

When used as a step-action controller without a position feedback (QLMNR_ON =0), manual adjustment of the manipulated variable is only possible at the finalpositions. In this case the safety position or the manual value is interpreted by thecontroller module as follows:

LMN_SAFE < 40 %: Close actuating element completely

LMN_SAFE < 60 %: Open actuating element completely

40 % ≤ LMN_SAFE ≤ 60 %:Hold current setting

Calling OBs

The block can be installed alternatively in the following OBs:

Cyclic task:OB1

Watchdog interrupt OB: for example OB32

The block must be installed with the same instance in following OBs:

• OB82 For diagnostic interrupt recognition

• OB83 For withdrawn/plugged recognition

• OB100 For start-up recognition

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.6.2 Addressing

The controller channel of an FM355 belonging to the instance is addressed via itslogic basis address (is set with HW Config) (LADDR input) and the controllerchannel number (CHANNEL input). The rack into which the FM355 is plugged ismonitored by the RACK block. You have to connect the input RAC_DIAG with theoutput RAC_DIAG of the corresponding instance of the RACK block. The racknumber of the rack is set at the RACK block.

• If there is no FM355 controller module in the slot specified by the logical basicaddress, the QPARAF and QCH_F outputs are set. This also happens if youdo not enter a valid value for the channel number. Valid values for theCHANNEL input are 1 to 4.

The "FMCS_PID“ block does not communicate with the corresponding controllermodule, if the rack has failed (QRACKF = 1), the rack has been withdrawn(QMODF = 1), an incorrect geographic address or an incorrect channel numberhas been set.

3.6.3 Function

The "FMCS_PID" block forms the interface between the controller block (FM355)and the blocks of the SIMATIC PCS 7 libraries. It can also be interconnected withother SIMATIC S7 blocks.

The block and the controller module run asynchronously to each other.

All the relevant process and disturbance variables are provided by the module andcan only be read by the block. In addition the block can transfer various operatingmodes and settings to the controller module.

As a rule, the FM355 obtains its parameters via the block. Whenever a parameterchanges at the block, the change is transferred to the module. If, however, youwant to carry out a parameter change directly at the FM355 by means of theOperator Panel (OP), you first have to enable this function by using the OP_SELfunction (OP_SEL = 1). OP_SEL must be reset if you want to limit operator controland parameter configuration to the block again after the OP has been used.

When configuration via the OP is permitted, the controller module does not acceptany parameters from the block. However, the blocks continues to update theprocess values SP_OP_ON, LMNOP_ON, SP_OP and LMN, so that a bumplesschangeover is possible to the mode in which configuration is carried out by theblock. The remaining parameters (for example, GAIN) are overwritten with the dataof the block instance as soon as you set OP_SEL = 0. The entries made with theOP are lost, if you have not entered the data in the block instance before reversingOP_SEL.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



A part of the parameters cannot only be specified by means of the configurationtool, but also via the function block. These two parameter records can deviate fromeach other. The input SDB_SEL at the function block is used in order to avoid thisconflict. SDB_SEL = 1 is used to specify that the module only reads theseparameters from the function block and not from the parameter configuration tool.SDB_SEL = 0 is used to specify that the module only reads these parameters fromthe function block and not from the parameter configuration tool. Note that theparameters are transferred from the parameter configuration tool to the module atevery STOP-RUN transition of the CPU. On the other hand, the parameters of theFB are transferred to the module at every change in the block input.

When configuration via the OP is permitted, the operator inputs are disabled withthe following exception: The operation OP_SEL=0 (re-activate P bus operation) ispossible.

3.6.4 Setpoint, limit, error signal and manipulated variable generation

Setpoint generation

The setpoint SP can be obtained from four different sources:

• It can be taken from one of the controller modules (you have configured it viaOP, or the module is in back-up mode). In this case setpoint operation isdisabled and the applied value is written to the operating input SP_OP of theblock.

• The other three sources depend on the inputs SP_TRK_ON andLIOP_INT_SEL.

Setpoint generation by the FMCS_PID block

SP_TRK_ON LIOP_INT_SEL SP= State

0 0 SP_INT Internal setpoint


1 Irrelevant PV Tracked setpoint

The effective setpoint is limited to the range (SP_LLM, SP_HLM).

If the setpoint is followed up to the process value PV (SP = PV), the error signal ERbecomes 0. The integrator of the controller module is managed so that there is nojump at the controller output when the follow-up mode is quit.

Bumpless changeover to manual operation is ensured by writing back the activesetpoint and manipulated variables.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Limit generation

Depending on the input MONERSEL, the controller module monitors either theprocess value PV (MONERSEL = 0) or the error signal ER (MONERSEL = 1) forwarning and alarm limits (L_WRN, H_WRN, L_ALM, H_ALM). Monitoring is carriedout with the common hysteresis HYS.

The block makes the monitoring result available at the QL_WRN, QH_WRN,QL_ALM and QH_ALM outputs. While monitoring the process value PV the blocksignals any exceeding of the upper and lower limits, unless message suppressionhas been activated.

Error signal

The error signal is formed by the controller module from the active setpoint SP andthe process value PV and is made available at output ER of the block.

After the dead band DEADB_W has been passed through, the error signal isprocessed further in the PID algorithm. A disturbance variable is not added.

Manipulated variable generation

The manipulated variable LMN comes from one of three sources. The sourcedepends on the inputs LMNTRKON and AUT_ON_OP.

Manipulated variable generation by the FMCS_PID block

LMNTRKON AUT_ON_OP LMN State

0 0 = LMN_OP Manual mode

0 1 From the PIDalgorithm of themodule

Automatic mode

1 Irrelevant = LMN_TRK Manipulated variabletracked

In the case of step controllers the manipulated variable is converted into positioningpulses (QLMNUP; QLMNDN) under consideration of the motor-specific parameters"Motor actuating time" (MOTOR_TM), Minimum pulse duration (PULSE_TM),Minimum break duration (BREAK_TM).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.6.5 Manual, automatic and tracking mode

Manual mode

The manipulated variable is determined by operating the input LMN_OP. Whenchanging over to automatic mode, the module takes over the manipulated variableset "manually“ as the operating point.

Automatic mode

The manipulated variable is calculated by the PID or fuzzy algorithm of the module.The control parameters GAIN, TI, TD and TM_LAG can be interconnected.

The controller direction of control action can be reversed (rising error signal causesa falling manipulated variable) by configuring the proportional gain GAINnegatively.

The integral action can be de-activated by setting TI=0.

The operator-controllable manipulated-variable input LMN_OP is followed up to theLMN output so that bumpless changing over from automatic to manual mode isensured.

Tracking the manipulated variable

When the manipulated variable is being tracked (LMNTRKON = 1), theinterconnected input LMN_TRK is transferred as the manipulated variable to thecontroller module, whereby the manual input LMN_OP and the integrator arefollowed up so that bumpless changing over is possible.

External setpoint (LMN_RE)

The block transfers the value LMN_RE to the FM355. The FM355 uses theexternal manipulated variable LMN_RE as the manipulated variable LMN, ifLNM_REON = 1 is set.

3.6.6 Operating mode selection

This can be triggered either by operator control or via interconnected inputs. Thechangeover is carried out by means of the operator control blocks assigned to themodes.


The changeover is carried out by OS operation of the input SPEXTSEL_OP or byinterconnection of SPEXON_L. These changeovers must be enabled by using thecorresponding enable inputs SPINT_EN, SPEXT_EN or the selection inputLIOP_INT_SEL.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Manual/Automatic

The changeover is carried out by OS operation of the input AUT_ON_OP or byinterconnection of AUT_L. This changeover must be enabled by using thecorresponding enable inputs MANOP_EN, AUTOP_EN or the selection inputLIOP_MAN_SEL.

In order to ensure a bumpless changeover, the following actions are carried out inthe states mentioned below:

External setpoint with "Setpoint tracking" (SP_TRK_ON = 1)

The block transfers the value SP_EXT to the FM355. The manual setpoint SP_OP(of the block) is tracked to the setpoint read back by the FM355.

"Setpoint tracking" (LMNTRKON = 1)

The block transfers the value LMN_TRK to the FM355. The manual manipulatedvariable SP_OP (of the block) is tracked to the manipulated variable read back bythe FM355.

3.6.7 Safety operation

The interconnectable input SAFE_ON is used to activate safety operation. This isexecuted by the controller module with highest priority. In safety operation thevalue present at the LMN_SAFE input of the block is output at the control output.

3.6.8 Transferring parameters to the module

The channel-specific controller and operating parameters are transferred to thecontroller module whenever a corresponding block parameter changes. As long asoperator control via OP is disabled, the module rejects the parameters written bythe block.

The process of transferring the controller and operating parameters to thecontroller module can require several block calls.

3.6.9 Reading data from the module

The channel-specific process variables are read by the controller module whenevera block is called up. The reading process can require several block calls, inparticular in the case of decentralized operation.

If you have changed channel-specific controller and operating parameters on themodule by means of an operator control via OP, the block also reads the currentparameters from the controller modules. It then updates the SP_OP_ON (setpoint-value operation on), LMNOP_ON (manipulated-variable operation on), SP_OP(operating setpoint) and LMN_OP (operating manipulated variable) inputs.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.6.10 Error handling

The block supplies the following error displays:

Error display Meaning

QOP_ERR = 1 Operator control error: If there is no new operator control error, QOP_ERR is reset duringthe next block cycle.

QPARF = 1 Error in the block parameter configuration.

QPARF_FM = 1 Error during direct parameter assignment to the controller module by the parameterassignment tool.

QCH_F = 1 Channel error. Due to a hardware fault the controller channel belonging to the instancecannot provide valid results.

QRACKF = 1 Rack failure.

QMODF = 1 Controller module has been withdrawn or is faulty.

QPERAF = 1 I/O access error. The block could not access the controller module.

3.6.11 Start-up, time and message characteristics of FMCS_PID


When the CPU starts up or during the cold restart of the block, the blockdetermines whether a controller module of the FM355 type is plugged in at thespecified slot (is specified by the inputs SUBN_ID, RACK_NO and SLOT_NO). Ifnot, the error display QPARF=1 (refer to error handling) is emitted. The operatingmodes MANUAL and INTERNAL are set.

The following cases are differentiated:

• The FM335 had failed and it was not being operated via OP before its failure.The block transfers the current controller and operating parameters to theFM355.

• The FM335 had failed and it was being operated via OP before its failure.The block reads the current values from the FM355 and updates its outputsSP, LMN, Q_SP_OP and QLMNOP.

• The FM335 had not failed and it was being operated via OP.The block reads the current values from the FM355 and updates its outputsSP, LMN, Q_SP_OP and QLMNOP.

• The FM335 had not failed and it was not being operated via OP.The controller and operating parameters of the FM and the block are identical.The block does nothing.

The block transfers the controller and operating parameters to the FM355 duringthe start-up (however not during the initial run).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Time response

Does not exist.


The FMCS_PID block uses the ALARM8_P block to generate messages.

Messages are triggered by:

• The limit monitoring functions of the process value and the system deviation

• The hardware monitoring function of the module





Can be suppressedby

1 QPARF Parameter assignment error S -

2 QPERAF I/O access error S -

3 QMODF Device failure. S -

4 QCH_F Controller channel fault S -

5 QH_ALM TOO HIGH AH M_SUP_AL,MSG_LOCK

6 QH_WRN HIGH WH M_SUP_ER,MSG_LOCK

7 QL_WRN LOW WL M_SUP_ER,MSG_LOCK

8 QL_ALM TOO LOW AL M_SUP_AL,MSG_LOCK

The first three of the auxiliary process values of message block have BATCHflexible data assigned, the next three contain information on the location of theblock and the seventh is reserved for the process variable.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





1 BA_NA

2 STEP_NO

3 BA_ID

4 SUBN_ID

5 RACK_NO

6 SLOT_NO (High Byte), CHANNEL (Low Byte)

7 PV

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist

3.6.12 Back-up mode of the FM355

If the CPU changes over to STOP or fails, the FM355 changes over to back-upoperation. In this case it enables operator control via the OP automatically (acts asif OP_SEL=1).

3.6.13 Connections of FMCS_PID


Meaning Datatype


AUT_L Automatic linking value

Interconnectable input forMANUAL/AUTO:0 = Hand, 1= Auto

BOOL 0 I Q

AUT_ON_OP

Operator Input Mode

0 = MANUAL, 1 = AUTO

BOOL 0 IO B +

AUTOP_EN Automatic opmode enable BOOL 0 I Q


BA_ID Batch ID DWORD 0 IO Q +

BA_NA Batch Name STRING[16]

0 I Q +

BREAK_TM Minimum break time (s) REAL 2 I Q

CHANNEL Channel Number INT 1 I

D_EL_SEL Derivative element input forthe controller

INT 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


DEADB_W Dead band width REAL 0 I +

DISV Disturbance variable REAL 0 O

EXT Error signal REAL 0 O

FUZID_ON Fuzzy identification on BOOL 0 I Q

GAIN Proportional gain REAL 1 I +

H_ALM High limit alarm REAL 100 I + H_ALM > H_WRN>L_WRN > L_ALM

H_WRN High limit warning REAL 90 I + H_ALM > H_WRN>L_WRN > L_ALM

HYS Hysteresis REAL 1 I + >= 0

LADDR Logical Address of FM355 INT 0 I

L_ALM Low limit alarm REAL 0 I + H_ALM > H_WRN>L_WRN > L_ALM

L_WRN Low limit warning REAL 10 I + H_ALM > H_WRN>L_WRN > L_ALM

LIOP_INT_SEL

Opmode internal/externalselection by link

1 = Interconnection active0 = Operator control active

BOOL 0 I Q

LIOP_MAN_SEL

Opmode AUT/MANUALselection by link

1 = Interconnection active0 = Operator control active

BOOL 0 I Q

LMN Manipulated variable REAL 0 O +

LMN_A Manipulated value A of splitrange function/repeatedmanipulated value

REAL 0 O

LMN_B Manipulated value B of splitrange function

REAL 0 O

LMN_HLM Manipulated value high limit REAL 100 I +

LMN_LLM Manipulated value low limit REAL 0 I +

LMN_OP Manipulated variable byoperator

REAL 0 IO B +

LMN_RE External tracking value REAL 0 I Q

LMN_REON External tracking value on BOOL 0 I Q

LMN_SAFE Safety manipulated value REAL 0 I +

LMNDN_OP Manipulated signal downoperation

BOOL 0 I Q

LMNOP_ON Manipulated variable byoperator on

BOOL 0 IO

LMNRHSRE High limit signal of repeatedmanipulated value

BOOL 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


LMNRLSRE Low limit signal of repeatedmanipulated value

BOOL 0 I Q

LMNRS_ON Simulation of the repeatedmanipulated value on

BOOL 0 I Q

LMNRSVAL Start value of the repeatedmanipulated value insimulation

REAL 0 I Q

LMNSOPON Manipulated signaloperation on

BOOL 0 I Q

LMNTRKON Tracking (manipulated valuefrom analog input)

BOOL 0 I Q

LMNUP_OP Manipulated signal upoperation

BOOL 0 I Q

M_SUP_AH Message suppression ofhigher alarm

BOOL 0 I Q +

M_SUP_AL Message suppression oflower alarm

BOOL 0 I Q +

M_SUP_WH Message suppression ofhigher warning

BOOL 0 I Q +

M_SUP_WL Message suppression oflower warning

BOOL 0 I Q +

MANOP_EN Manual operator modeenable

BOOL 0 I Q

MO_PVHR Monitored PV high rangelimit

Upper display limit(measuring range)

REAL 110 I +

MO_PVLR Monitored PV low range limit

Lower display limit(measuring range)

REAL -10 I +

MODE_CS Mode: 0=C-controller,1=S-controller

BOOL 0 I QB +

MONERSEL Monitoring: 0 = Processvariable1 = Error signal

BOOL 0 I Q

MSG_ACK Message acknowledge WORD 0 O

MSG_EVID MESSAGE ID

ALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O +

MSG_LOCK MESSAGE LOCK

1= Process-state-specificmessage suppression

BOOL 0 I Q +

MSG_STAT MESSAGE 1:STATUS output

WORD 0 O

MTR_TM Motor manipulated value (s) REAL 60 I Q

OCCUPIED Occupied by Batch BOOL 0 I Q +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


OP_SEL Operation selection switch

0 = P-bus1 = C-bus

BOOL 0 I Q +


P_SEL P action on BOOL 1 I Q

PFDB_SEL P action in feedback path BOOL 0 I Q

PULSE_TM Minimum pulse time (s) REAL 2 I Q

PV Process variable REAL 0 O E +

Q_SP_OP Status:1 = Operator may entersetpoint

BOOL 0 O +

QAUTOP Status: 1=Operatorenabled for "AUTO"

BOOL 0 O +

QCH_F Channel error BOOL 0 O

QDNRLM Limit of negative setpointinclination reached

BOOL 0 O

QERR Negated value of ENO BOOL 1 O

QFUZZY 0 = PID algorithm, 1 = Fuzzy BOOL 0 O

QH_ALM High limit alarm reached BOOL 0 O

QH_WRN High limit warning reached BOOL 0 O

QL_ALM Low limit alarm reached BOOL 0 O

QL_WRN Low limit warning reached BOOL 0 O

QLMN_HLM 1 = High limit of manipulatedvalue reached

BOOL 0 O

QLMN_LLM 1 = Low limit of manipulatedvalue reached

BOOL 0 O

QLMN_RE 0 = Manual, 1 = Automatic BOOL 0 O

QLMNDN Manipulated signal down BOOL 0 O

QLMNOP Status: 1 = Operatorenabled for "manipulatedvalue operation"

BOOL 0 O +

QLMNOPON Manipulated value operationon

BOOL 0 O

QLMNR_HS High limit signal of repeatedmanipulated value

BOOL 0 O

QLMNR_LS Low limit signal of repeatedmanipulated value

BOOL 0 O

QLMNR_ON Repeated manipulated valueon

BOOL 0 O

QLMNSAFE Safety operation BOOL 0 O

QLMNTRK Tracking operation BOOL 0 O

QLMNUP Manipulated signal up BOOL 0 O

QMAN_AUT 0 = MANUAL Mode, 1 =AUTO

BOOL 0 O +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


QMANOP Status: 1 = Operatorenabled for "MANUAL"

BOOL 0 O +

QMODF 1 = Module Failure BOOL 0 O


1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +

QMSG_SUP 1 = Message SuppressionActive

BOOL 0 O +

QOP_ERR 1 = Operator Error BOOL 0 O

QOP_SEL Operation from P-Bus (0) orC-Bus (1)

BOOL 0 O

QPARF 1 = Parameter AssignmentError

BOOL 0 O

QPARF_FM 1 = FM ParameterAssignment Error

BOOL 0 O

QPERAF 1 = I/O Access Failure BOOL 0 O

QRACKF 1 = Rack Failure BOOL 1 O

QSP_HLM 1 = Setpoint Output HighLimit Active

BOOL 0 O

QSP_LLM 1 = Setpoint Output LowLimit Active

BOOL 0 O

QSPEXTEN Status:1 = Operator enabledfor "EXTERNAL"

BOOL 0 O +

QSPINTEN Status:1 = Operator enabled for"INTERNAL"

BOOL 0 O +

QSPINTON Internal setpoint on BOOL 0 O +

QSPLEPV Fuzzy display: Setpoint <process variable

BOOL 0 O

QSPOPON Setpoint operation on BOOL 0 O

QSPR Split-range operation BOOL 0 O

QUPRLM Limit of positive setpointinclination

BOOL 0 O

RAC_DIAG STRUCT

.SUBN_TYP 1=External DP interface BOOL 0 I Q

.SUBN1_ID ID of Primary Subnet BYTE 255 I Q

.SUBN2_ID ID of Redundant Subnet BYTE 255 I Q

.RACK_NO Rack/Station Number BYTE 255 I Q

.RACK_ERR

1=RACK ERROR BOOL 0 I Q

.LADDR Base Address of Client WORD 0 I Q

RUNUPCYC Lag: number of run upcycles

INT 3 I

SAFE_ON Safety position on BOOL 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


SDB_SEL 1 = No parameter from SDB

1 = The remainingparameters remain in forceafter a STOP-RUN transitionin the CPU

BOOL 0 I Q +

SP Setpoint REAL 0 O E +

SP_EXT External setpoint REAL 0 I Q

SP_HLM Setpoint high limit REAL 100 I +

SP_INT Internal setpoint REAL 0 I Q

SP_LLM Setpoint low limit REAL 0 I +

SP_OP Operator input setpoint REAL 0 IO B +

SP_OP_ON Enable:1 = Operator for setpointinput

BOOL 1 IO Q

SP_TRK_ON 1 = Let SP_OP equal PV

1 = SP_OP is tracked to PV

BOOL 0 I +

SPBUMPON SP bumpless on BOOL 1 I +

SPEXON_L linkable input to selectSP_EXT

Interconnectable input forSP_EXT ( 1 = SP_EXT isactive)

BOOL 0 I Q

SPEXT_EN External setpoint enable BOOL 0 I Q

SPEXTSEL_OP

External setpoint selectionby operator

BOOL 0 IO B +

SPINT_EN Internal setpoint enable BOOL 0 I Q

STEP_NO BATCH step number WORD 0 IO Q +

SUBN_TYP 1=External DP interface BOOL 0 I

TD Derivative time (s) REAL 0 I + 0 or >= 1.0

TI Reset time (s) REAL 3000 I + 0 or >= 0.5

TM_LAG Time lag of the derivativeaction (s)

REAL 5 I + w0.5


Parameters with the same name such as the FB "PID_CS also have the samemeaning (refer to the manuals Controller module FM355 Structuring andConfiguration).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



3.6.14 Operator control and monitoring of FMCS_PID






SP



PV_IN

(bar at extreme right)(red= upper alarmvalue)(red= lower alarmvalue)

PVH_ALM

PVL_ALM

(yellow= upperwarning value)(yellow= lowerwarning value)

PVH_WRN

PVL_WRN

Mode

(selection list:Manual/Automatic) 5

QMAN_AUT


Setpoint


HL=SetpointLL=) 5

SP

SP_HLM

SP_OP

SP_LLM

Setpoint

Process variable PV

(unit setpoint/processvariable)

(S7_shortcut of PV)

Manual


HL=ManualLL=)

6

6

LMN_OP

LMN_HLM

LMN_OP

LMN_LLM

LMN high limit

LMN low limit

Manipulated variable LMN

(unitmanual/manipulatedvariable)

(S7_shortcut of LMN)

(symbol bell)


QMSG_SUP

MSG_LOCK


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






Manual (as pointer)

Manipulated variable(as a horizontal bar)





(selection list:internal/external)

QSPEXTON

SPEXTSEL_OP =0/1 SP =internal/external

Bumpless SPBUMPON =0/1 SP bumpless off/onTracking SP_TRK_ON =0/1 SP track off/onOperator OP OP_SEL =0/1 Switch to P-Bus/

Switch to C-BusSDB data SDB_SEL SDB parameter

=Yes/No

Error Signal AlarmAlarm high QH_ALMAlarm low QL_ALMWarning high QH_WRNWarning low QL_WRNError signal EXT




Parameter Control parameters

KP 6 GAIN GainTI s (=in sec) 6 TI TITD s 6 TD TD

ParameterDead band DEADB_W Dead bandHysteresis(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=HysLL=)

6

6

HYS

(no check)

HYS

0,0

Hysteresis

Hysteresis

Time lag S TM_LAG Time lag

Manipulated variableSafety 6 LMN_SAFE LMN safety

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






BarUpper limit(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Bar HLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_PVHR

(no check)

MO_PVHR

MO_PVLRLower limit(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Bar LLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_PVLR

MO_PVHR

MO_PVLR

(no check)





(upper value) SP_HLM(lower value) SP_LLM

(red bar= alarm)(upper value) PVH_WRN(lower value) PVL_WRN

(yellow bar= warning)(upper value) PVH_ALM(lower value) PVL_ALM

AlarmAOact (=active)

6

6

H_ALM

M_SUP_AH =0/1

HH alarm

SuppressHH=No/Yes

WHact

6

6

H_WRN

M_SUP_WH =0/1

H alarm

SuppressH=No/Yes

WLact

6

6

L_WRN

M_SUP_AL =0/1

LL alarm

SuppressLL=No/Yes

ALact

6

6

L_ALM

M_SUP_WL =0/1

LL alarm

SuppressLL=No/Yes

Setpoint

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001







HL=SetpointLL=)

6

6

6

SP_HLM

(no check)

SP_HLM

SP_LLM

SP high limit

SP high limit

SP low limit


HL=SetpointLL=)

6

6

6

SP_LLM

SP_HLM

SP_LLM

(no check)

SP low limit

SP high limit

SP low limit

Manual ValueHL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=ManualLL=)

6

6

6

LMN_HLM

(no check)

LMN_HLM

LMN_LLM

LMN high limit

LMN high limit

LMN low limitLL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box

HL=ManualLL=)

6

6

6

LMN_LLM

LMN_HLM

LMN_LLM

(no check)

LMN low limit

LMN high limit

LMN low limit









Standard S MotorMinimum pulse PULSE_TMMinimum pause BREAK_TMRuntime MTR_TMOpen limit reached QLMNR_HSClose limit reached QLMNR_LS

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






Actuating signalopen

QLMNUP

Actuating signalclose

QLMNDN

With feedback LMNR_ON

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001


4 Motor and valve

4.1 MOT_REV: Reversing motor

4.1.1 Description of MOT_REV


FB 67

Calling OBs

The watchdog interrupt OB into which the block is installed (for example OB32).Additionally in OB 100 (see start-up characteristics).

Function

The block is used to drive motors with 2 directions of rotation(clockwise/counterclockwise). A maximum of 2 feedback signals, which aregenerated by auxiliary contactors, are monitored.

Operating principle

Various inputs are available for controlling the motor. They are implemented in aconcrete hierarchical dependency to each other and to the motor states. Inparticular the locking, the feedback or direction-of-rotation monitoring and themotor circuit breaker influence the control signals QSTART (1: on, 0: off) and QDIR(1: counterclockwise, 0: clockwise).

The priority of the individual input variables and events with regard to theirinfluence on the control signals is listed in the following table. The subsequentsections provide any further details.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Priority: Event:

High Motor protection error, if MSS_OFF = 1

⇑ Waiting time at change of direction

LOCK = 1

LOCK_ON = 1 (with LOCK_DIR)

⇓ Monitoring error, if FAULT_OFF = 1

Low Automatic/Manual mode

No effect Motor protection error, if MSS_OFF = 0

Monitoring error, if FAULT_OFF = 0

Control system error, operator error

Manual/Automatic

Selection takes place either by OS operating control from AUT_ON_OP or bymeans of interconnection at the AUT_L input, provided the enables necessary forthis purpose exist. The set operating mode is indicated at the output QMAN_AUT(1: Auto, 0: Manual).

Manual operation: This operating mode permits control from the OS or control viainterconnectable inputs.

OS operation: (LINK_MAN = 0): The following inputs are operated from the OS:FORW_ON for forward (clockwise), REV_ON for reverse (counterclockwise) andMOT_OFF for switching off. The corresponding enables (FW_OP_EN, RV_OP_ENor OFFOP_EN) must exist.

Operation via interconnectable inputs: (LINK_MAN = 1): In this case thecommands are obtained via the inputs L_FORW, L_REV and L_OFF. You canconnect these to allow tracking, for example, or local control. However you mustmake your selection via the switches LINK_MAN, LIOP_SEL and AUT_L usingsuitable logic.

Automatic mode: The automatic instructions are obtained via the inputsAUTO_ON (1: ON, 0: OFF) or AUTO_DIR (1:counterclockwise, 0=clockwise) bymeans of interconnection of a block under automatic control.

Interlock

The interlock function takes priority over all other control signals and errors - withthe exception of the motor circuit with a corresponding enable (MSS_OFF = 1) andthe time monitoring function at a change of direction. If LOCK is set, the motor isswitched off directly, whereas a set LOCK_ON switches the motor on directly,provided that LOCK is not also set. LOCK_DIR is used to specify the desireddirection of rotation for LOCK_ON = 1.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Monitoring

The monitoring logic monitors the agreement between the control commandsQSTART or QDIR and the process-variable feedbacks FB_ON or FB_DIR andoutputs the actual state via QRUN and QSTOP. It sets a monitoring error(QMON_ERR = 1) if after the period TIME_MON no feedback corresponding toQSTART or QDIR has set in or if it changes unexpectedly without a request byQSTART or QDIR.

If there is no feedback, either QSTART can be interconnected to FB_ON and QDIRto FB_DIR or monitoring can be de-activated by setting MONITOR = 0.

The parameter FAULT_OFF specifies the relevance of the monitoring error. IfFAULT_OFF = 1, the motor is switched off in case of an error, whereas the errordoes not have any effect on the control outputs if FAULT_OFF = 0.

Motor protection

• If the edge of the motor protection signal MSS drops, the motor protection erroris set holding and passed to the output QMSS_ST. The parameter MSS_OFFis used to specify whether only a display is carried out (MSS_OFF=0), orwhether the motor is to be limited while disregarding all other inputs andsystem states (MSS_OFF = 1).

Bumpless changeover

In order to ensure bumpless changeover in all operating modes to manual mode,the manual values FORW_ON, REV_ON and MOT_OFF are always tracked to thecurrent values of QSTART and QDIR (exception: Change in the direction ofrotation).

Reversal of the direction of rotation

If selected, the procedure is as follows:

• The motor is stopped (QSTART=0).

• The internal switch-off monitor waits for the time period TIME_OFF and thenstarts the motor so that it turns in the opposite direction, provided the switch-offmonitor does not report an error. It should be noted here that the switch-offtime TIME_OFF specifies the time presumed to pass before the motor actuallycomes to a halt, thus allowing the direction of rotation to be changed withoutcausing damage to the motor. The feedback message regarding motorstandstill does not cut the time since this message is generated by the auxiliarycontactor and does not provide any information on the actual state of themotor.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Error handling

The motor protection switch (QMSS_ST = 1) and the monitoring error(QMON_ERR=1) act as the trigger for the error status. They can be reset at arising edge of MSS either by operating RESET or automatically by interconnectingL_RESET with "1". The control system fault CSF is only transmitted to the OS.Together with the motor protection error and the monitoring error it is applied to thegroup error QGR_ERR. It does not have any further influence on the blockalgorithm.

Operator errors are indicated by the output QOP_ERR without a message.

Start-up after error status

The system makes a differentiation based on the operating mode active at themoment of reset:

• In automatic mode the motor can restart after the reset provided acorresponding start signal is supplied by the automatic mode.

• In manual mode the motor must be switched on explicitly since manualoperation had been tracked to "OFF".


When the CPU starts, the MOTOR block is switched to manual operation and theOFF command given. For this the block must be called from the start-up OB. WithCFC project planning this is handled by CFC. With simple STEP 7 resources youwill have to enter the call in the start-up OB. After start-up, messages will besuppressed for the number of cycles configured in the value RUNUPCYC.

The START_OFF input is used to specify whether the motor is terminated whenthe CPU is started (START_OFF=1) or whether the last operating state is retained.

Time response



The MOT_REV block uses the ALARM8_P block to generate messages.

The messages are triggered by the control system faults.

Motor protection switch and the monitoring error (run-time error)

The CSF signal which is referenced by interconnection.

QMSG_SUP is set if the RUNUPCYC cycles have not expired yet since a restart,or if MSG_STAT = 21.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve



Message No. Block parameter Default message text Message class Can be suppressedby

1 QMSS_ST MOTOR PROTECTION S -

2 QMON_ERR RUNTIME ERROR S -





1 BA_NA

2 STEP_NO

3 BA_ID

4 AUX_PR04

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


4.1.2 Connections of MOT_REV




Interconnectable input forMANUAL/AUTO(0=Manual/1=Auto)

BOOL 0 I Q


BOOL 0 IO B +

AUTO_DIR AUTO MODE:1=REVERSE/ANTICLOCKWISE,0=FORWARDS/CLOCKWISE

BOOL 0 I Q

AUTO_ON AUTO MODE:1=ON, 0=OFF BOOL 0 I Q


BOOL 1 I Q




BA_NA BATCH NAME STRING[16] 0 I Q +


BOOL 0 I Q

FAULT_OFF 1=IN CASE OF FAULT: MOTOROFF

BOOL 1 I Q

FB_DIR FEEDBACK:1=REVERSE/ANTICLOCKWISE,0=FORWARDS/CLOCKWISE

BOOL 0 I Q

FB_ON FEEDBACK: 1=ON BOOL 0 I Q

FORW_ON OPERATOR INPUT:1=SWITCHONFORWARD/CLOCKWISE

BOOL 0 IO B +

FW_OP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUTFORWARDS/CLOCKWISE

BOOL 1 I Q

L_FORW AUTO MODE 1=SWITCH ONFORWARD/CLOCKWISE

BOOL 0 I Q

L_OFF AUTO MODE: 1=MOTOR OFF BOOL 0 I Q

L_RESET LINKABLE INPUT RESET

Interconnectable input RESET

BOOL 0 I Q

L_REV AUTO MODE 1=SWITCH ONREVERSE/ANTICLOCKWISE

BOOL 0 I Q

LINK_MAN SELECT: 1=LINK,0=OPERATORINPUT ENABLED

BOOL 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve




LIOP_SEL SELECT: 1=LINKING,0=OPERATOR ACTIVE

Interconnectable input formanual/automatic-changeover(AUT_L)1= Interconnection is active0 = Operator control is active

BOOL 0 I Q

LOCK 1=LOCK TO OFF BOOL 0 I Q +

LOCK_DIR 1=REV, 0=FORW

Direction of rotation LOCK_ON =11 = Forwards/clockwise,0 = Reverse/anticlockwise

BOOL 0 I Q +

LOCK_ON 1=LOCK TO ON BOOL 0 I Q +

MANOP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATORMAY INPUT MANUAL

BOOL 1 I

MONITOR SELECT: 1=MONITORING ON,0=MONITORING OFF

BOOL 1 I Q +

MOT_OFF OPERATOR INPUT: 1=MOTOROFF

BOOL 0 IO B +

MSG_ACK MESSAGE ACKNOWELEGED WORD 0 O

MSG_EVID MESSAGE ID

ALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O +


MSS MOTOR PROTECTINGSWITCH:0=ACTIVE

i.e. 0 = Error

BOOL 1 I Q

MSS_OFF 1=IN CASE OF MSS-FAULT:MOTOR

1 = Stop motor at motorprotection fault

BOOL 1 I Q


OFFOP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR FOR"OFF"

BOOL 1 I Q


BOOL 0 O +

QDIR CONTROL OUTPUT:1=REVERSE/ANTICLOCKWISE

BOOL 0 O +

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QFORW_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FORFORWARD/CLOCKWISE

BOOL 0 O +

QGR_ERR 1=GROUP ERROR BOOL 0 O


BOOL 0 O +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve




QMANOP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLE FOR"MANUAL" MODE

BOOL 0 O +

QMON_ERR 1=MONITORING ERROR BOOL 0 O +


1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +


BOOL 0 O +

QMSS_ST UNACKNOWLEDGED MOTORPROTECTIVE SWITCH

BOOL 0 O +

QOFF_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "OFF"

BOOL 0 O +


QREV_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLEREVERSE/ANTICLOCKWISE

BOOL 0 O +

QRUN STATUS: 1=MOTOR RUNNING BOOL 0 O +

QSTART CONTROL OUTPUT 1=STARTACTIVE

BOOL 0 O +

QSTOP STATUS: 1=MOTOR STOP BOOL 0 O +

RESET OPERATOR INPUT ERRORRESET

BOOL 0 IO B +

REV_ON OPERATOR INPUT:1=REVERSE/ANTICLOCKWISE

BOOL 0 IO B +


INT 3 I

RV_OP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT REVERSE

BOOL 1 I Q

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [S] REAL 1,0 I >0

START_OFF 1=START UP WITH MOTOROFF

BOOL 1 I Q


TIME_OFF MONITORING TIME FOR OFF[S]

REAL 3,0 I + ≥ 0

TIME_ON MONITORING TIME FOR ON [S] REAL 3,0 I + ≥ 0


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


4.1.3 Operator control and monitoring of MOT_REV





Default (Symbol motor)

Status

(upper display field,empty)

Forward

Reverse

Stop

QRUN&QDIR

QRUN&QDIR

QSTOP

(middle display field,empty)

MonitoringQMON_ERR

(lower display field,empty)

ProtectionQMSS_ST

Mode

(selection list:

Manual/Automatic) 5

QMAN_AUT

AUT_ON_OP=0/1 Manual mode/

Automatic mode

Command

(selection list:

Forward

Stop

Reverse)

5

5

5

FORW_ON=1

MOT_OFF=0

REV_ON=0

Motor forwards

5

5

5

FORW_ON=0

MOT_OFF=0

REV_ON=1

Motor reverse

5

5

5

FORW_ON=0

MOT_OFF=1

REV_ON=0

Motor off

Monitoring/protection

reset 5 RESET =1 Error reset



(symbol lock) LOCK

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve





Maintenance Monitoring timeon s (=in sec)(in thecorresponding inputdialog box

HL=TimeLL=)

6

6

TIME_ON

(no check)

TIME_ON

0,0

Mon. time on

Mon. time on

off s(in thecorresponding inputdialog box

HL=TimeLL=)

6

6

TIME_OFF

(no check)

TIME_OFF

0,0

Mon. time off

Mon. time off

active (=active) 6 MONITOR = 0/1 Monitoring off/on


Parametersof the AS block




21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


4.2 MOT_SPED: Motor with two speeds

4.2.1 Description of MOT_SPED


FB 68

Calling OBs


Function

The block is used to drive motors with 2 speeds (slow/fast). A maximum of 2feedback signals, which are generated by auxiliary contactors, are monitored.

Operating principle

Various inputs are available for controlling the motor. They are implemented in aconcrete hierarchical dependency to each other and to the motor states. Inparticular the locking, the feedback monitoring and the motor circuit breakerinfluence the control signals QSTART (1: on, 0: off) and QSPEED (1: fast, 0: slow).

The priority of the individual input variables and events with regard to theirinfluence on the control signals is listed in the following table. The subsequentsections provide any further details.

Priority: Event:


LOCK = 1

c LOCK_ON = 1 (with LOCK_SPD)






21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Note

Deceleration times when changing over from the fast to the slow speed have toset by means of a timer (on delay) outside the block.

Manual/Automatic


• Manual operation: This operating mode permits control from the OS or controlvia interconnectable inputs.

- OS operation: (LINK_MAN = 0): The following inputs are operated fromthe OS: SP1_ON for slow speed, SP2_ON for fast speed or MOT_OFF forswitching off. The corresponding enables (S1_OP_EN, S2_OP_EN orOFFOP_EN) must exist.

- Operation via interconnectable inputs: (LINK_MAN = 1): In this casethe commands are obtained via the inputs L_SP1, L_SP2 and L_OFF. Youcan connect these to allow tracking, for example, or local control. Howeveryou must make your selection via the switches LINK_MAN, LIOP_SEL andAUT_L using suitable logic.

• Automatic mode. The automatic instructions are obtained via the inputsAUTO_ON (1: ON, 0: OFF) or AUTO_SPD (1: fast, 0: slow) by means ofinterconnection of a block under automatic control.

Interlock

The interlock function takes priority over all other control signals and errors - withthe exception of the motor circuit with a corresponding enable (MSS_OFF = 1). IfLOCK is set, the motor is switched off directly, whereas a set LOCK_ON switchesthe motor on directly, provided that LOCK is not also set. LOCK_SPD is used tospecify the desired speed for LOCK_ON = 1 (1: fast, 0: slow).

Monitoring

The monitoring logic monitors the agreement between the control commandsQSTART or QSPEED and the process-variable feedbacks FB_ON or FB_SPEEDand outputs the actual state via QRUN and QSTOP. It sets a monitoring error(QMON_ERR = 1) if after the period TIME_MON no feedback corresponding toQSTART or QSPEED has set in or if it changes unexpectedly without a request byQSTART or QSPEED.

If there is no feedback, either QSTART can be interconnected to FB_ON andQSPEED to FB_SPEED or monitoring can be de-activated by settingMONITOR = 0.


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Motor protection

If the edge of the motor protection signal MSS drops, the motor protection error isset holding and passed to the output QMSS_ST. The parameter MSS_OFF is usedto specify whether only a display is carried out (MSS_OFF=0), or whether themotor is to be limited while disregarding all other inputs and system states(MSS_OFF = 1).

Bumpless changeover

In order to ensure bumpless changeover in all operating modes to manual mode,the manual values SP1_ON, SP2_ON and MOT_OFF are always tracked to thecurrent values of QSTART and QSPEED.

Error handling










Time response


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve



The MOT_SPED block uses the ALARM8_P block to generate messages.Messages are triggered by:

• Control system fault

• Motor protection switch and the monitoring error (run-time error)

• The CSF signal which is referenced by interconnection.










1 BA_NA

2 STEP_NO

3 BA_ID

4 AUX_PR04

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


4.2.2 Connections of MOT_SPED




Interconnectable input forMANUAL/AUTO (0=Manual/1=Auto)

BOOL 0 I Q

AUT_ON_OP OPERATOR INPUT MODE 1=AUTO,0= MANUAL

BOOL 0 IO B +


AUTO_SPD AUTOMATIC VALUE 1=FAST,0=SLOW

BOOL 0 I Q


BOOL 1 I Q





0 I Q +


BOOL 0 I Q

FAULT_OFF 1=IN CASE OF FAULT: MOTOR OFF BOOL 1 I Q


FB_SPEED FEEDBACK SPEED: 1=FAST BOOL 0 I Q

L_OFF AUTO MODE: 1=MOTOR OFF BOOL 0 I Q



BOOL 0 I Q

L_SP1 LINKABLE INPUT: 1=SPEED1 ON

Automatic value 1 = Switch onforwards/clockwise

BOOL 0 I Q

L_SP2 LINKABLE INPUT: 1=SPEED2 ON /

Automatic value 1 = Switch onreverse/anticlockwise

BOOL 0 I Q

LINK_MAN SELECT: 1=LINK, 0=OPERATORINPUT ENABLED

0= Operator input enabled1= Manual control via L_SP1, L_SP2,L_MOTOFF

BOOL 0 I Q

LIOP_SEL SELECT: 1=LINKING,0=OPERATORACTIVE

Interconnectable input formanual/automatic-changeover(AUT_L)1 = Interconnection is active0 = Operator control is active

BOOL 0 I Q


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve





LOCK_SPD 1=FAST, 0=SLOW BOOL 0 I Q +

MANOP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATORMAY INPUT MANUAL

BOOL 1 I Q


BOOL 1 I +

MOT_OFF OPERATOR INPUT: 1=MOTOR OFF BOOL 0 IO B +

MSG_ACK MESSAGE ACKNOWLEDGED WORD 0 O

MSG_EVID MESSAGE ID

ALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O +


MSS MOTOR PROTECTINGSWITCH:0=ACTIVE

i.e. 0 = Error

BOOL 1 I Q

MSS_OFF 1=IN CASE OF MSS-FAULT:MOTOR OFF

BOOL 1 I Q


OFFOP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR FOR "OFF" BOOL 1 I Q


BOOL 0 O +

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QGR_ERR 1=GROUPERROR

BOOL 0 O


QMANOP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEFOR "MANUAL" MODE

BOOL 0 O +



1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +


BOOL 0 O +


BOOL 0 O +

QOFF_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "OFF"

BOOL 0 O +



QS1_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEDFOR "SPEED1"

BOOL 0 O +

QS2_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEDFOR "SPEED2"

BOOL 0 O +

QSPEED CONTROL OUTPUT SPEED:1=FAST

BOOL 0 O +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve





BOOL 0 O


QSTOPING RESERVED MESSAGE BOOL 0 O +

QSTRTING RESERVED MESSAGE BOOL 0 O +

RESET OPERATOR INPUT ERROR RESET BOOL 0 IO B +


INT 3 I

S1_OP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT SPEED1

BOOL 1 I Q

S2_OP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT SPEED2

BOOL 1 I Q

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [S] REAL 1,0 I > 0

SP1_ON OPERATOR INPUT: 1=STARTSPEED1

BOOL 0 IO B +

SP2_ON OPERATOR INPUT: 1=STARTSPEED2

BOOL 0 IO B +

START_OFF 1=START UP WITH MOTOR OFF BOOL 1 I Q


TIME_MON MONITORING TIME FOR ON [S] REAL 3,0 I + ≥ 0


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


4.2.3 Operator control and monitoring of MOT_SPED






Status(upper display field,empty)stopslowfast

QSTOPING; QSTOP

QSTRTING; QRUN

QSPEED(middle display field,empty)Monitoring QMON_ERR

(lower display field,empty)Protection QMSS_ST

Mode:

(selection list: Manual/Automatic) 5

QMAN_AUT

AUT_ON_OP =0/1 Manual mode/

Automatic mode

Command

(selection list:fastslowStop)

5

5

5

SP1_ON =1

SP2_ON =0

MOT_OFF =0

Motor speed 1

5

5

5

SP1_ON =0

SP2_ON =1

MOT_OFF =0

Motor speed 2

5

5

5

SP1_ON =0

SP2_ON =0

MOT_OFF =1

Motor off

Monitoring/protectionreset 5 RESET =1 Error reset



(symbol lock) LOCK

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve





Maintenance Monitoring timeon/off s (=in sec)(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=TimeLL=)

6

6

TIME_MON

(no check)

TIME_MON

0,0

Mon. time on/off

Mon. time on/off

active 6 MONITOR =0/1 Monitoring off/on






4.3 MOTOR: Motor with one control signal

4.3.1 Description of MOTOR


FB 66

Calling OBs


Function

The block is used to drive motors with a control signal (on/off). A motor runningfeedback (on/off) can be monitored optionally. This motor running feedback signalis supplied by an auxiliary contactor.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Operating principle

Various inputs are available for controlling the motor. They are implemented in aconcrete hierarchical dependency to each other and to the motor states. Inparticular the locking, the feedback monitoring and the motor circuit breakerinfluence the control signals QSTART.

The priority of the individual input variables and events with regard to theirinfluence on the control signal is listed in the following table. The subsequentsections provide any further details.

Priority: Event:


LOCK = 1

c LOCK_ON = 1






Manual/Automatic

Changeover between the two operating modes is carried out either through OSoperator control by means of AUT_ON_OP (LIOP_SEL = 0) or by interconnectingthe input AUT_L (LIOP_SEL = 1). If selection is carried out via the OS system, thecorresponding enables AUTOP_EN and MANOP_EN must be set. The setoperating mode is indicated at the output QMAN_AUT (1: Auto, 0: Manual).

• Manual operation: Operation is carried out via the input MAN_ON by meansof the OS system, if the corresponding enables ON_OP_EN and OFFOP_ENexist.

• Automatic mode: The control command is obtained via the interconnectedinput AUTO_ON from an automatic unit.

Interlock

The interlock function takes priority over all other control signals and errors - withthe exception of the motor circuit with a corresponding enable (MSS_OFF = 1). IfLOCK is set, the motor is switched off directly, whereas a set LOCK_ON switchesthe motor on directly, provided that LOCK is not also set.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Monitoring

The monitoring logic monitors the agreement between the control commandQSTART and the process-variable feedback FB_ON and outputs the actual statevia QRUN and QSTOP. It sets a monitoring error (QMON_ERR = 1) if after theperiod TIME_MON no feedback corresponding to QSTART has set in or if itchanges unexpectedly without a request by QSTART.

If there is no feedback, either QSTART can be interconnected to FB_ON ormonitoring can be de-activated by setting MONITOR = 0.


Motor protection

If the edge of the motor protection signal MSS drops, the motor protection error isset holding and passed to the output QMSS_ST. The parameter MSS_OFF is usedto specify whether only a display is carried out (MSS_OFF=0), or whether themotor is to be limited while disregarding all other inputs and system states(MSS_OFF = 1).

Bumpless changeover

In order to ensure a bumpless changeover to manual mode the manual valueMAN_ON is always tracked to the current value of QSTART.

Error handling







21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve





Time response



The MOTOR block uses the ALARM8_P block for generating messages.


Motor protection switch and the monitoring error (run-time error)

The CSF signal which is referenced as a control system error by interconnection.








21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve




1 BA_NA

2 STEP_NO

3 BA_ID

4 AUX_PR04

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist

4.3.2 Connections of MOTOR




Interconnectable input forMANUAL/AUTO (0=Manual/1=Auto)

BOOL 0 I Q


BOOL 0 IO B +


AUTOP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT AUTO

BOOL 1 I Q





0 I Q +


BOOL 0 I Q

FAULT_OFF 1=IN CASE OF FAULT:MOTOR OFF

BOOL 1 I Q




BOOL 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve






BOOL 0 I Q



MAN_ON OPERATOR INPUT: 1=ON, 0=OFF BOOL 0 IO B +


BOOL 1 I Q


BOOL 1 I +


MSG_EVID MESSAGE ID

ALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O +


MSS MOTOR PROTECTING SWITCH:0=ACTIVE

i.e. 0 = Error

BOOL 1 I Q


BOOL 1 I Q


OFFOP_EN ENABLE 1 = OPERATOR FOR"OFF"

BOOL 1 I Q

ON_OP_EN ENABLE 1 = OPERATOR MAYINPUT ON

BOOL 1 I Q

QAUTOP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEDFOR "AUTO"

BOOL 0 O +

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QGR_ERR 1=GROUPERROR

BOOL 0 O


BOOL 0 O +

QMANOP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEFOR "MANUAL" MODE

BOOL 0 O +



1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +


BOOL 0 O +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve





Saved motor protective switch (1 =error)

BOOL 0 O +

QOFF_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEDFOR "OFF"

BOOL 0 O +

QON_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEDFOR "ON"

BOOL 0 O +




BOOL 0 O +


RESET OPERATORINPUT ERROR RESET

BOOL 0 IO B +


INT 3 I

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [S]/Sample time in [s]

REAL 1,0 I > 0

START_OFF 1=START UP WITH MOTOR OFF BOOL 1 I Q


TIME_MON MONITORING TIME FOR ON [S] REAL 3,0 I + > 0


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


4.3.3 Operator control and monitoring of MOTOR






Status(upper display field,empty)OnOff

QRUN =on

QSTOP =off

(middle display field,empty)Monitoring QMON_ERR


Mode


QMAN_AUT


Command

(selection list:off/on) 5 MAN_ON =0/1 Motor=Stop/Start

Monitoring/protection/locking

reset 5 RESET =1 Error reset



(symbol lock) LOCK




Maintenance Monitoring timeon/off s (=in sec)(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=TimeLL=)

6

6

TIME_MON

(no check)

TIME_MON

0,0

Mon. time on/off

Mon. time on/off


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve







4.4 VAL_MOT: Motor valve control

4.4.1 Description of VAL_MOT


FB 74

Calling OBs


Function

The block is used to drive motor valves with two control signals. The valve can bestopped in any position. Optionally the two position feedback signals (open/closed)are monitored. The position feedback signals are generated by limit switches.

Operating principle

Various inputs are available for controlling the motor valve. They are implementedin a concrete hierarchical dependency to each other and to the system states. Inparticular the locking, the feedback or direction-of-rotation monitoring and themotor circuit breaker influence the control signals QSTART (0: motor on, 1: motoroff) and QOC (1: open, 0: close).


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Priority: Event:


⇑ Monitoring error, if FAULT_OFF = 1

Waiting time at change of direction

V_LOCK = 1

VL_CLOSE = 1

VL_OPEN = 1

⇓ VL_HOLD = 1





Manual/Automatic


• Manual operation: This operating mode permits control from the OS or controlvia interconnectable inputs.

- OS operation (LINK_MAN = 0): The input OPEN_VAL is used for opening,CLOS_VAL for closing or STOP_VAL for stopping via the OS. Thecorresponding enables (OP_OP_EN, CL_OP_EN or ST_OP_EN) mustexist.

- Operation via interconnectable inputs (LINK_MAN = 1): In this case thecommands are obtained via the inputs L_OPEN, L_CLOSE and L_STOP.You can connect these to allow tracking, for example, or local control.However you must make your selection via the switches LINK_MAN,LIOP_SEL and AUT_L using suitable logic.

• Automatic mode: The automatic instructions are obtained via the inputsAUTO_ON (1: on, 0: off) or AUTO_OC (1: open, 0: close) by means ofinterconnection of a block under automatic control.

Interlock

The interlock function has a higher priority than all other control inputs. It is onlyoverwritten by the motor protection fault and the monitoring error with thecorresponding enables (MSS_OFF = 1, FAULT_OFF = 1). If V_LOCK is set, themotor valve is brought to its position of rest defined by SS_POS. It is opened orclosed respectively by VL_OPEN or VL_CLOSE. VL_HOLD blocks the automaticand manual inputs and retains the last state request. The priorities of the individuallocking inputs are described in the Operating principle section.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Monitoring

The monitoring logic (active at MONITOR=1) checks agreement between thesetpoint state (determined by QSTART and QOC) and feedback of the valveprocess variable (provided by FB_OPEN and FB_CLOSE). If the setpoint state hasnot been reached after the monitoring time TIME_ON has expired, the outputQMON_ERR is set. QMON_ERR is also set without a waiting period, if thefeedback changes without a reason (command).If no feedbacks are connected, this fact must be signaled to the monitoring functionby setting MONITOR = 0. The monitor then assumes that the setpoint state of thevalve has been reached once the time TIME_ON has elapsed.In error-free monitoring operation the outputs QOPENING and QCLOSING willindicate whether the valve is opening or closing, while the outputs QOPENED andQCLOSED show whether the valve has reached the limit position.If the valve is stopped in an intermediate position, then the direction of movementwill continue to be indicated with QOPENING=1 or QCLOSING=1 while the 0 willbe shown for the limits.

The parameter FAULT_OFF specifies the relevance of the monitoring error. IfFAULT_OFF = 1, the motor is switched off in case of a fault and the valve remainsin the current position, whereas the fault has no effect on the control outputs ifFAULT_OFF = 0. In the latter case the block behaves as if the monitoring functionwere switched off and displays the monitoring error only at the output QMON_ERR.

The TIME_OFF parameter specified the waiting period until the motor can beswitched on again after having been switched off. When the limit of the valve isreached, QSTART = FALSE is set. Restarting of the motor in the other directionwith QSTART=TRUE is not carried out until the configured period TIME_OFF hasexpired. (Also refer to Change in the direction of travel).

Motor protection

If the edge of the motor protection signal MSS drops, the motor protection error isset holding and passed to the output QMSS_ST. The parameter MSS_OFF is usedto specify whether only a display is carried out (MSS_OFF=0), or whether themotor is to be stopped without regard to all other inputs and system states(MSS_OFF = 1) and the valve remains in the current position.

Bumpless changeover

In order to ensure bumpless changeover in all operating modes to manual mode,the manual values OPEN_VAL, CLOS_VAL and STOP_VAL are always tracked tothe current values of QSTART and QDIR (exception: change in the direction ofrotation).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Change in the direction of travel

If the direction of travel of the valve changes before the limit is reached, thefollowing steps are taken:

• The motor is stopped (QSTART=0).

• The internal switch-off monitor waits for the time period TIME_OFF and thenstarts the motor so that it turns in the opposite direction, provided the switch-offmonitor does not report an error.

Error handling





• In automatic mode the motor valve cannot start up again until the monitoring ormotor protection error is reset and a corresponding start signal is supplied bythe automatic system.

• In manual mode the motor must be switched on explicitly since manualoperation had been tracked to "HOLD".


When the CPU starts, the VAL_MOT block is switched to manual operation and theHOLD command output. For this the block must be called from the start-up OB.With CFC project planning this is handled by CFC. With simple STEP 7 resourcesyou will have to enter the call in the start-up OB. After start-up, messages will besuppressed for the number of cycles configured in the value RUNUPCYC.

Time response


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve



The VAL_MOT block uses the ALARM8_P block to generate messages.


• Motor protection switch and the monitoring error (run-time error)











1 BA_NA

2 STEP_NO

3 BA_ID

4 AUX_PR04

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


4.4.2 Connections of VAL_MOT




Interconnectable input forMAN/AUTO(0: Manual/1:Auto)

BOOL 0 I Q

AUT_ON_OP

OPERATOR INPUT MODE1=AUTO, 0= MANUAL

BOOL 0 IO B +

AUTO_OC AUTOMATIC MODE DIRECTIONOF ROTATION: 1=OPEN, 0=CLOSE

BOOL 0 I Q



BOOL 1 I Q





0 I Q +

CL_OP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT CLOSE

BOOL 1 I Q

CLOS_VAL OPERATOR INPUT: 1=STARTVALVE CLOSE

BOOL 0 IO B +

CSF CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT

1 = External fault

BOOL 0 I Q

FAULT_OFF 1=IN CASE OF FAULT: MOTOROFF

BOOL 1 I Q

FB_CLOSE FEEDBACK: 1=CLOSE BOOL 0 I Q

FB_OPEN FEEDBACK: 1=OPEN BOOL 0 I Q

L_CLOSE AUTO MODE 1=START CLOSEVALVE

BOOL 0 I Q

L_OPEN AUTO MODE: 1=START OPENVALVE

BOOL 0 I Q



BOOL 0 I Q

L_STOP AUTO MODE: 1=STOP VALVE BOOL 0 I Q

LINK_MAN SELECT: 1=LINK, 0=OPERATORINPUT ENABLED

0= Operator input enabled 1=Manual control via L_OPEN,L_CLOSE, L_STOP

BOOL 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve






BOOL 0 I Q


BOOL 1 I Q


BOOL 1 I +


MSG_EVID MESSAGE ID

ALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O +


MSS MOTOR PROTECTING SWITCH:0=ACTIVE

i.e. 0 = Error

BOOL 0 I Q


1 = Stop motor at motor protectionfault

BOOL 1 I Q


OP_OP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT OPEN

BOOL 1 I Q

OPEN_VAL OPERATOR INPUT: 1=STARTOPEN VALVE

BOOL 0 IO B +


BOOL 0 O +

QCL_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "CLOSE"

BOOL 0 0 +

QCLOSED 1=VALVE IS CLOSED BOOL 0 O +

QCLOSING 1=VALVE IS CLOSING BOOL 0 O +

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QGR_ERR 1=GROUP ERROR BOOL 0 O


QMANOP STATUS: 1 = OPERATOR ENABLEFOR "MANUAL" MODE

BOOL 0 O +



1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +


BOOL 0 O +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve





Saved motor protective switch (1 =error)

BOOL 0 O +

QOC CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION:1 = OPEN

BOOL 0 O


QOP_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEDFOR "OPEN"

BOOL 0 O +

QOPENED 1=VALVE IS OPEN BOOL 0 O +

QOPENING 1=VALVE IS OPENING BOOL 0 O +

QST_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEDFOR "STOP"

BOOL 0 O +


BOOL 0 O +

RESET OPERATOR INPUT ERROR RESET BOOL 0 IO B +


INT 3 I

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME REAL 1,0 I >0

SS_POS SAFE POSITION. 1=OPEN,0=CLOSE

BOOL 0 I Q

ST_OP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT STOP

BOOL 1 I Q


STOP_VAL OPERATOR INPUT: 1=STOPVALVE

BOOL 0 IO B +

TIME_OFF MONITORING TIME FOR MOTOROFF [S]

REAL 3,0 I + ≥ 0

TIME_ON MONITORING TIME FOR VALVERUNNING [S]

REAL 3,0 I + ≥ 0

V_LOCK 1=LOCK TO SAVE POSITION BOOL 0 I Q +

VL_CLOSE 1=LOCK TO CLOSE BOOL 0 I Q +

VL_HOLD 1=LOCK TO CURRENT POSITION

1 = Interlock (hold/disabled)

BOOL 0 I Q +

VL_OPEN 1=LOCK TO OPEN BOOL 0 I Q +


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


4.4.3 Operator control and monitoring of VAL_MOT





Default (Symbol motor valve)

Status(upper display field,empty)openingOpenedclosingClosed

QOPENING

QOPENED

QCLOSING

QCLOSED(middle display field,empty)Monitoring QMON_ERR


Mode(selection list:Manual/Automatic) 5

QMAN_AUT


Command(selection list:OpenCloseStop)

5

5

5

OPEN_VAL =1

STOP_VAL =0

CLOS_VAL =0

Open valve

5

5

5

OPEN_VAL =0

STOP_VAL =0

CLOS_VAL =1

Close valve

5

5

5

OPEN_VAL =0

STOP_VAL =1

CLOS_VAL =0

Stop valve

Monitoring/protectionreset 5 RESET =1 Error reset



(symbol lock) V_LOCK

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve





Maintenance Monitoring timeOpen s (=in sec)(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=TimeLL=)

6

6

TIME_ON

(no check)

TIME ON

0,0

Mon. time on

Mon. time on

Close s(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=TimeLL=)

6

6

TIME_OFF

(no check)

TIME OFF

0,0

Mon. time off

Mon. time off







21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


4.5 VALVE: Valve control

4.5.1 Description of VALVE


FB 73

Calling OBs


Function

The block is used to drive control valves (open/close fittings) with a control signal(open/close). The position of rest of the valve can be closed or opened. Optionallythe two position feedback signals (open/closed) are monitored. The positionfeedback signals are generated by limit switches.

Operating principle

Various inputs are available for controlling the valve. They are implemented in aconcrete hierarchical dependency to each other and to the valve states. Inparticular the locking and the feedback monitoring influence the control signalQCONTROL.


Priority: Event:

High V_LOCK = 1

VL_CLOSE = 1

c VL_OPEN = 1



No effect Monitoring error, if FAULT_OFF = 0


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


Position of rest

The position of rest of the controlled valve is signaled to the block by configuringthe input SS_POS (1: open, 0: closed). This only affects the definition of the controloutput QCONTROL (0: position of rest, valve terminated). The input-endcommands remain unaffected ("1" always means "open" at the input).

Example: If SS_POS=1 (valve with position of rest "open") the control outputQCONTROL=1 means "Close valve".

Manual/Automatic


• Manual operation: The input MAN_OC is operated via the OS. Thecorresponding enables (OP_OP_EN or CL_OP_EN) must exist.

• Automatic mode: The control command is obtained via the input AUTO_OC(1: open, 0: close) by means of interconnection to an automatic unit.

Interlock

The interlock function takes priority over all other control signals and errors. IfV_LOCK is set, the valve is brought to its position of rest (QCONTROL = 0). IfV_LOCK is not set, a locking state (open/closed) can also be selected directly viathe inputs VL_OPEN and VL_CLOSE. The signal VL_CLOSE locks VL_OPEN.

Monitoring

The monitoring logic checks the agreement between the output control commandQCONTROL and the feedback of the process variable of the valve (FB_OPEN,FB_CLOSE). If the limit has not been reached after the monitoring timeTIME_MON has expired, the output QMON_ERR is set. QMON_ERR is also set(without a waiting period), if the feedback changes without a reason (command).The valve is set into the position of rest (de-energized).If no limit feedback are connected, this fact must be signaled to the monitoringfunction by setting MONITOR = 0. This then assumes that the limit of the valve hasbeen reached once the time TIME_MON has elapsed. Until ten QOPENING orQCLOSING is displayed.In error-free monitoring operation the outputs QOPENING and QCLOSING willindicate whether the valve is opening or closing, while the outputs QOPENED andQCLOSED show whether the valve has reached the limit position.

The inputs NO_FB_xx and NOMON_xx are used to configure whether there is nofeedback for the states "open" and "closed" (NO_FB_xx=1),or whether the existingfeedback for example, due to the failure of the limit switch, should not be evaluated(NOMON_xx=1).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


The parameter FAULT_SS specifies the relevance of the monitoring error. IfFAULT_SS = 1, the motor is brought to its position of rest defined by SS_POS incase of a fault, whereas the fault has no effect on the control outputs if FAULT_SS= 0.

Bumpless changeover

In order to ensure a bumpless changeover to manual mode the manual valueMAN_OC is always tracked to the current value of QCONTROL.

Error handling

The monitoring error (QMON_ERR = 1) is signaled to the OS and influences thefunctionality of the block, as described above. It can be reset either by operatingRESET or automatically by interconnection to a rising edge of L_RESET. Thecontrol system fault CSF is only transmitted to the OS. Together with themonitoring it is applied to the group error QGR_ERR. It does not have any furtherinfluence on the block algorithm.




• In automatic mode the motor valve cannot start up again until the monitoring ormotor protection error is reset and a corresponding start signal is supplied bythe automatic system.

• In manual mode the motor must be switched on explicitly since manualoperation had been tracked to "HOLD".


When the CPU starts, the VALVE block is switched to manual operation and theQCONTROL=0 (position of rest) is output. For this the block must be called fromthe start-up OB. With CFC project planning this is handled by CFC. With simpleSTEP 7 resources you will have to enter the call in the start-up OB. After start-up,messages will be suppressed for the number of cycles configured in the valueRUNUPCYC.

The START_SS input is used to specify whether the valve is terminated when theCPU is started (START_SS=1) or whether the last operating state is retained.

Time response


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve



The VALVE block uses the ALARM8_P block for generating messages.


• The monitoring error (run-time error)










1 BA_NA

2 STEP_NO

3 BA_ID

4 AUX_PR04

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve


4.5.2 Connections of VALVE



AUT_L LINKABLE INPUT FORMANUAL/AUTO MODEInterconnectable input forMAN/AUTO(0: Manual/1:Auto)

BOOL 0 I Q


BOOL 0 IO B +

AUTO_OC AUTO MODE:1=OPEN, 0=CLOSE BOOL 0 I QAUTOP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAY

INPUT AUTOBOOL 1 I Q


BA_EN BATCH ENABLE BOOL 0 I Q +BA_ID BATCH ID DWORD 0 IO Q +BA_NA BATCH NAME STRING[16] 0 I Q +

CL_OP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT CLOSE

BOOL 1 I Q

CSF CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT1 = External fault

BOOL 0 I Q

FAULT_SS 1=In case of fault: Safe StatePosition

BOOL 1 I Q

FB_CLOSE FEEDBACK: 1=CLOSE BOOL 0 I Q

FB_OPEN FEEDBACK: 1=OPEN BOOL 0 I QL_RESET LINKABLE INPUT RESET

Interconnectable input RESETBOOL 0 I Q

LIOP_SEL SELECT: 1=LINKING,0=OPERATOR ACTIVEInterconnectable input formanual/automatic-changeover(AUT_L)1 = Interconnection is active0 = Operator control is active

BOOL 0 I Q

MAN_OC OPERATOR INPUT: 1=OPEN,0=CLOSE

BOOL 0 IO B +


BOOL 1 I Q


BOOL 1 I +


MSG_EVID MESSAGE IDALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O +

MSG_STAT MESSAGE 1: STATUS Output WORD 0 ONO_FB_CL MOTOR PROTECTING

SWITCH:0=ACTIVEi.e. 0 = Error

BOOL 0 I Q

NO_FB_OP 1=NO FEEDBACK OPENPRESENT

BOOL 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve




NOMON_CL 1=NO FEEDBACK CLOSEPRESENT

BOOL 0 I Q

NOMON_OP 1=NO FEEDBACK CLOSEPRESENT

BOOL 0 I Q

OCCUPIED OCCUPIED BY BATCH BOOL 0 I Q +OP_OP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR MAY

INPUT OPENBOOL 1 I Q


BOOL 0 O +

QCL_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "CLOSE"

BOOL 0 O +

QCLOSED 1=VALVE IS CLOSED BOOL 0 O +QCLOSING 1=VALVE IS CLOSING BOOL 0 O +

QCONTROL CONTROL OUTPUT:0=STANDSTILL

BOOL 0 O

QERR 1=ERROR(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QGR_ERR 1=GROUP ERROR BOOL 0 OQMAN_AUT 1=AUTO, 0=MANUAL MODE BOOL 0 O +

QMANOP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLEDFOR "MANUAL" MODE

BOOL 0 O +


QMSG_ERR 1=MESSAGE ERROR1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +


BOOL 0 O +


QOP_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "OPEN"

BOOL 0 O +

QOPENED 1=VALVE IS OPEN BOOL 0 O +QOPENING 1=VALVE IS OPENING BOOL 0 O +RESET OPERATOR INPUT ERROR

RESETBOOL 0 IO B +


INT 3 I

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME REAL 1,0 I > 0

SS_POS SAFE POSITION. 1=OPEN,0=CLOSE

BOOL 0 I Q

START_SS 1=START WITH SAFE STATEPOSITION AND MANUAL MODE

BOOL 1 I Q

STEP_NO BATCH STEP NUMBER WORD 0 IO Q +TIME_MON MONITORING TIME REAL 3,0 I + ≥ 0

V_LOCK 1=LOCK TO SAFE POSITION(SS_POS)

BOOL 0 I Q +

VL_CLOSE 1=LOCK TO CLOSE BOOL 0 I Q +VL_OPEN 1=LOCK TO OPEN BOOL 0 I Q +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve



4.5.3 Operator control and monitoring of VALVE




Operator text in the log

Default (Symbol motor valve)

Status(upper display field,empty)openingOpenedclosingClosed

QOPENING

QOPENED

QCLOSING

QCLOSED(lower display field,empty)Monitoring

QMON_ERR

Mode:


QMAN_AUT


Command

(selection list:open/close)

5 MAN_OC =0/1 Valve close/

valve open

Monitoring/lockingreset 5 RESET 0 / Error Reset

(symbol bell) Q_MSGSUP


(symbol lock) V_LOCK




Maintenance Monitoring timeopen/close s(=sinsec)(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=TimeLL=)

6

6

TIME_ON

TIME_ON

Mon. time on/off

Mon. time on/off

active 6 MONITOR =0/1 Monitoring=

Off/On

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Motor and valve







21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001


5 Other technological blocks

5.1 ADD4_P: Addition for a maximum of 4 values

5.1.1 ADD4_P: Addition for a maximum of 4 values


FC 256

Function

The block calculates the sum of up to 4 valuesV = U1+...+Un (n≤4)

Calling OBs

Only the OB in which the block is installed.

Error handling

In case of an overflow the upper or lower range limit which was exceeded of thetype REAL is set in the result V and ENO = 0 is assigned.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Other technological blocks


5.1.2 Connections ADD4_P


Meaning Datatype

I/O Attr.

U1 Addend 1 REAL I Q




V Result REAL O


5.2 ADD8_P: Addition for a maximum of 8 values

5.2.1 ADD8_P: Addition for a maximum of 8 values


FC 257

Function

The block calculates the sum of up to 8 valuesV = U1+U2+U3+...+Un (n≤8)

Error handling


Calling OBs

Only the OB in which the block is installed.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.2.2 Connections ADD8_P


Meaning Data type Initial I/O Attr.




.... .... .... .... .... ....


V Result REAL O


5.3 AVER_P: Time average

5.3.1 Description of AVER_P


FB 34

Calling OBs


Function

The block calculates the time average of an active parameter by means of the timewhich has passed since its start in accordance with the following equation:

V = (N ∗ Valt + U) / (N+1), with:

• U: Applied parameter

• V: Current average

• Vold: Average of the cycles executed since the start

• N: Number of cycles used for averaging

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle

The block operates in accordance with the following scheme:

• Calculation is started by the upward edge of the RUN input. Any event V stillexisting is overwritten by the input value U (also refer to the start-upcharacteristics).

• In the subsequent cycles the result is recalculated in output V and the cyclecounter N is incremented.

• The calculation is terminated by resetting the RUN input and the results V andN are saved to the most recent state.

Error handling

In case of an overflow the upper or lower range limit which was exceeded of thetype REAL is set in the result V and ENO = 0 as well as QERR=1 are assigned.


During the initial run as well as during a CPU start-up:

• The input value U is written to the output V,

• The cycle counter N is reset.

To this purpose the block is called from the start-up OB.

Time response

In order to carry out the defined function properly the block is called from awatchdog interrupt OB. The time Taverage used for the average can be calculatedby the user in accordance with the equation below:

Taverage = N ∗ Tsampling

where Tsampling is the sampling time of the block.When planning with CFC the higher-order runtime group of the block with itssampling parameter has to be taken into consideration.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.3.2 Connections of AVER_P



N NUMBER OF CYCLES

Number of cycles used for averaging

REAL 0 O

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O

RUN MODE: 1=CALCULATE AVERAGE,0=HOLD LAST VALUE

BOOL 0 I Q

U INPUT VALUE REAL 0 I Q

V Mean value REAL 0 O


5.4 COUNT_P: Counter

5.4.1 Description of COUNT_P


FB 36

Calling OBs

Only the OB in which the block is installed (for example OB32).

Function

When a positive edge of the binary input signal I0 occurs, the counter value V iscounted forwards or backwards, depending on the setting.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle


• The mode can be set via the MODE parameter:

- MODE=0 Forwards counter

- MODE=1 Backwards counter

• The block behaves as follows as a forward counter:

- The counter is incremented at every positive edge of the I0 input.

- When the upper limit V=V_HL is reached, the counter is not incrementedfurther and the output QVHL=1 is set.

- When the mode is changed to "Backwards counting", the output V isdecremented with the next positive edge of I0 and QVHL is reset.

- RESET=1 causes V=V_LL, QVLL=1, QVHL=0 as well as the internal edgeflag to be tracked to the input value.

• The block behaves as follows as a backward counter:

- The counter is decremented at every positive edge of the I0 input.

- When the lower limit V=V_LL is reached, the counter is not decrementedfurther and the output QVLL=1 is set.

- When the mode is changed to "Forwards counting", the output V isincremented with the next positive edge of I0 and QVLL is reset.

- RESET=1 causes V=V_HL, QVHL=1, QVLL=0 as well as the internal edgeflag to be tracked to the input value.

Error handling

In case of an overflow the upper or lower range limit which was exceeded of thetype REAL is set in the result V and ENO = 0 as well as QERR=1 are assigned.


During the initial run as well as during a CPU startup the block carries out a RESETprocess once in accordance with the configured mode (refer to Operating principle,RESET).

Time response

Does not exist. However, it is advisable to install the block in the OB whichcontains the block which supplies the signal edges.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.4.2 Connections of COUNT_P


Meaning Datatype

Initial I/O Attr. Valid values

I0 INPUT BOOL 0 I Q

MODE COUNTER MODE1 = DECREMENT, 0 =INCREMENT

BOOL 0 I Q

QERR 1=ERROR BOOL 1 O

QVHL 1=V > V_HL BOOL 0 O

QVLL 1=V < V_LL BOOL 0 O

RESET 1=RESET BOOL 0 I Q

V NUMBER OF SWITCHES DINT 0 O

V_HL HIGH LIMIT OUTPUT VALUE DINT 100 I V_HL ≥ V_LL

V_LL LOW LIMIT OUTPUT VALUE DINT 0 I V_LL ≤ V_HL


5.5 DEADT_P: Dead time element

5.5.1 Description of DEADT_P


FB 37

Function

An analog value of the input U is not output to the output V until after a definablenumber of cycles DEADT. The following equation applies:

V(t) = U(t-Tdead), with Tdead = DEADT ∗ Tsampling

Refer to the start-up characteristics for the time 0 < t < Tdead.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle

t

U(t)

V(t)

Tdead = DEAD x Tsampling

Tdead

Operating principle of the DEADT_P

• The block reads in the analog input value U in the running cycle, buffers it andpasses it to the output V after a number of DEADT cycles. The maximumnumber of buffered values is limited to 16 (also refer to error handling).

• If the parameter DEADT is changed while the block is running, the blockbehaves as at a CPU startup.

Error handling

If the parameter DEADT < 0 or DEADT > 16, DEADT=16 is used internally forcalculation and ENO=0 or QERR=1 is displayed.

Calling OBs



During a CPU startup or a change in the dead time via the parameter DEADT theinternal dead-time buffer has the active input value U assigned to it.

Time response

In order to carry out the defined function properly the block is called from awatchdog interrupt OB. The dead time Tdead can be calculated by the user byusing the following equation:

• Tdead = DEADT ∗ Tsampling

where Tsample is the sampling time of the block.

• When planning with CFC the higher-order runtime group of the block with itssampling parameter has to be taken into consideration.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.5.2 Connections of DEADT_P


Meaning Data type Initial I/O Attr. Validvalues

DEADT DEADTIME IN CYCLE INT 0 I Q < 16

QERR 1 = ERROR BOOL 1 O


V ANALOG OUTPUT REAL 0 O


5.6 DIF_P: Differentiation

5.6.1 Description of DIF_P


FB 38

Calling OBs


Function

The block approximates a DT1 action and operates according to the trapezoid rule:

V = TD/(TM_LAG+SAMPLE_T/2) ∗ (U-U_LAST)U_LAST = U_LAST + SAMPLE_T/TD ∗ V

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle

The algorithm functions according to the trapezoid rule. In addition the followingsteps are carried out:

• The output V is limited upwards to V_HL and downwards to V_LL. The internalcalculation is not affected by the limitation.

• At an active limitation the assigned output Q_HL or Q_LL is set.

t

TD

TM_LAG + SAMPLE_T/2

V_HL

V_LL

V

U=1 if t >0U=0 if t< 0

Input jump {

TM_LAG

Jump response of the DIF_P

Error handling

In case of an overflow the upper or lower range limit which was exceeded of thetype REAL is set and ENO = 0 is assigned. In addition the following incorrectconfigurations lead to ENO=0 and V=0:

• V_LL > 0

• V_HL < 0


After a CPU startup the internal flag for the old value of the input U is tracked tothis input. This ensures that the output value V=0 during the first cyclic operation.

Time response

The block is called via a watchdog interrupt OB.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.6.2 Connections of DIF_P


Meaning Datatype



QVHL 1= V > V_HL BOOL 0 O

QVLL 1= V < V_LL BOOL 0 O

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [S] REAL 1 I > 0

TD TIME DIFFERENCE [S] REAL 1 I Q ≥ 0

TM_LAG TIME LAG [S] REAL 10 I Q ≥ 0



V_HL HIGH LIMIT OUTPUT VALUE REAL 100 I Q V_HL ≥ V_LL

V_LL LOW LIMIT OUTPUT VALUE REAL -100 I Q V_LL ≥ V_HL


5.7 DOSE: Dosing process

5.7.1 Description of DOSE


FB 63

Calling OBs

The watchdog interrupt OB into which the block is installed (for example, OB32). Inaddition in OB 100 (see start-up characteristics).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Function

The DOSE block is used for upsizing or downsizing batches in single-componentdosing with weighing devices and also for dosing using volumetric measuringdevices. When flowmeters are used the flow should be made available afterintegration at input PV_IN. At the end of dosing an automatic correction fordribbling can be made which will become active at the next dosing. The originaldribbling is specified at the input DRIBB.The dosing value is monitored against the setpoint value for exceeding or fallingbelow tolerance and the results supplied to two corresponding outputs at the end ofdosing.

Operating Modes

The internal/external operating modes can be set, either via the inputSPEXTSEL_OP or the interconnected input SPEXON_L. The result togglesbetween "internal setpoint" and "external setpoint":

• Internal. The setpoint is passed on by the operation of SP_OP and at thesame time restricted to (SP_LLM, SP_HLM).

• External. The setpoint (SP) is obtained from SP_EXT and limited as describedabove.

Dosing start

The following operations are carried out in this step:

• Dosing is started by operating the input START_OP or by the rising edge of theinterconnected signal L_START in the same block.

• You have to wait until the scales stands still, i.e. STNDSTLL=1. If there is nostandstill signal available, this input must be configured with 1. This is followedby taring: in other words, the current process variable PV_IN is brought into thetare memory.

• Depending on whether batching is upward or downward (selected viaREVERSE), the current dosing value PV_OUT is calculated as follows:

- REVERSE=0: PV_OUT=PV_IN - TARA (PV_IN rises)

- REVERSE=1: PV_OUT=TARA - PV_IN (PV_IN falls)

• QSTRTDOS is set and QEND_DOS, QTOL_P and QTOL_N are reset (seecomponent change).

End of dosing

The final phase of dosing takes place in the following steps:

• As soon as PV_OUT ≥ SP - DRIBB_F, QSTRTDOS is reset.

• As soon as standstill is signaled (STNDSTLL=1), a counter with the time [s]specified under RELAXTME is loaded and then decremented cyclically by thesampling time SAMPLE_T. The settling time (QRELXING=1) runs as long asthe counter is > 0.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



• Once the settling time has elapsed, an underdosing or overdosing will beevaluated in accordance with the configured tolerance limits TOL_N andTOL_P, and a dribbling correction (see below) will be carried out, providedDRIB_COR=1.

• If the dosed quantity falls within the range of tolerance, the end of dosing(QEND_DOS=1) is set.

Component change

If there is a component change, set COMP_CHG = 1 before starting dosing. Whendosing is started (QSTRTDOS = 1), the dribbling value DRIBB at the outputDRIBB_F configured at this point is used.

Dribbling Correction

If correction is required (DRIB_COR=1), the dribbling value is calculated as follows(also refer to component change):

DRIBB_F = DRIBB_F - ( SP - PV_OUT ) * DCF / 100

whereby the following condition must be complied with:

0 ≤ DRIBB_F ≤ DRIBBMAX

The correction factor is limited internally to 0 -100.

Overdosing /underdosing

• In the event of overdosing (PV_OUT > SP + TOL_P), QTOL_P andQEND_DOS are set.

• In the event of underdosing (PV_OUT < SP - TOL_N) only QTOL_N is set. It ispossible to make up by hand (see "Post-dosing"). As soon as this isterminated, the dosing end is indicated (QEND_DOS=1). The block outputs arenot updated until the next dosing process is started.

Post-dosing

Only when there has been underdosing it is possible to make up by hand, via theoperation of POSTDOSE or the interconnectable input L_PDOSE.

• Set DRIB_COR = 1

• With the rising edge of the signal, the signal QSTRT_DOS for the start ofdosing is set for the time PDOS_TME. This procedure can be repeated untileither the setpoint value has been exceeded or the end of the procedure hasbeen acknowledged by means of operation of the ACK_TOL_OP input or ofthe interconnectable ACK_TOL.

• After acknowledgment the end of dosing (QEND_DOS=1) is displayed and nofurther updating of the outputs undertaken.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Cancel

If necessary, the dosing procedure can be terminated prematurely by means of theCANCEL_OP instruction or via the interconnectable input CANCEL. After this anew dosing run can be started.

Error handling

Operator errors of the various operator control blocks which are detected will beOR-ed and routed to the group output QOP_ERR. In the event of arithmeticalerrors the outputs ENO=0 and QERR=1 will be occupied.


At CPU startup "Abort dosing" will be simulated but without generating a messageFor this the block must be called from the start-up OB. With CFC project planningthis is handled by CFC. With simple STEP 7 resources you will have to enter thecall in the start-up OB. After start-up, messages will be suppressed for the numberof cycles configured in the value RUNUPCYC.

Time response



The DOSE block uses the ALARM8_P block to generate messages.


• The limit monitoring functions for the dosing value

• Reaching of the dosing end or aborting of the dosing process


Messages regarding limit infringements can be suppressed individually via thecorresponding M_SUP1 to 3 inputs. The process messages (not process controlmessages!) can be completely blocked with MSG_LOCK.


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




MessageNo.

Block parameter Default messagetext

Messageclass

Can besuppressedby

1 (SP-TOL_N ≤ PV_OUT ≤ SP+TOL_P) Dosing OK PM M_SUP_1,MSG_LOCK

2 QTOL_P Overdosing AH M_SUP_2,MSG_LOCK

3 QTOL_N Underdosing AL M_SUP_3,MSG_LOCK


5 CANCEL Cancel dosing PM MSG_LOCK

6 (PV_OUT < SP-TOL_N) Request foracknowledgment

OR -

The first three of the auxiliary process values of the message block have BATCHflexible data assigned, the fourth is reserved for PV_OUT and the remaining ones(AUX_PRx) can be assigned freely.



1 BA_NA

2 STEP_NO

3 BA_ID

4 PV_OUT

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.7.2 Connections of DOSE



ACK_TOL LINKABLE INPUT FORACK_TOL_OP

Interconnectable input forACK_TOL_OP

BOOL 0 I Q

ACK_TOL_OP

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTUNDERDOSING

BOOL 0 IO B +

AK_OP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT ACKNOWLEDGE

BOOL 1 I Q





" I Q +

CANCEL LINKABLE INPUT CANCELRUNNING DOSE PROCESS

Interconnectable input forCANCEL

BOOL 0 I Q

CANCEL_OP

CANCEL RUNNING DOSEPROCESS

Cancel running dosing process atpositive edge

BOOL 0 IO B +

CN_OP_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT CANCEL

BOOL 1 I Q

COMP_CHG 1=COMPONENT CHANGE ATNEXTDOSE START

BOOL 0 I +


BOOL 0 I Q

DCF DRIBBLING CORRECTIONFACTOR IN %

REAL 25 I Q + 0...100

DRIB_COR DRIBBLING CORRECTION:1=ON, 0=OFF

BOOL 0 I +

DRIBB DRIBBLING INITIAL VALUE REAL 0 I +

DRIBB_F CURRENT DRIBBLING VALUE REAL 0 O +

DRIBBMAX MAXIMAL DRIBBLING VALUE

(default is selected arbitrarily here,since the dimension is not knownuntil instancing is carried out)

REAL 999 I +

EXT CONTROL DIFFERENCE

Dosing error (ER = SP – PV_OUT)

REAL 0 O O +

L_PDOSE LINKABLE INPUT POSTDOSE

Interconnectable input postdosing

BOOL 0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





L_START LINKABLE INPUT: 1=START

Interconnectable input for START

BOOL 0 I Q

LIOP_SEL SELECT: 1=LINKING ,0=OPERATION

1=Interconnection is active;0=Operator control is active

BOOL 0 I Q +

M_SUP_1 SUPPRESS ALARMING NORMALDOSING

BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_2 SUPPRESS ALARMINGOVERDOSING

BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_3 SUPPRESS ALARMINGUNDERDOSING

BOOL 0 I +

MO_PVHR HIGH LIMIT BAR RANGE

Upper display limit (measuringrange)

REAL 110 I +

MO_PVLR LOW LIMIT BAR RANGE

Lower display limit (measuringrange)

REAL -10 I +


MSG_EVID MESSAGE ID

ALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O +


1 = Process-state-specificmessage suppression

BOOL 0 I Q +



P_OFF_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT CONTINUE

BOOL 1 I Q

P_ON_EN ENABLE: 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT PAUSE

BOOL 1 I Q

PAUSE LINKABLE INPUT FOR PAUSE

Interconnectable input forPAUSE_OP

BOOL 0 I Q

PAUSE_OP OPERATOR 1=STOP,0:CONTINUE RUNNING DOSEPROCEDURE

BOOL 0 IO B +

PD_OP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUTPOSTDOSE

BOOL 1 I Q

PDOS_TME POSTDOSE TIME [S] REAL 0 I +

POSTDOSE 1=POSTDOSE AT POSITIVEEDGE

BOOL 0 IO B +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





PV_IN PROCESS VALUE

Process value weight (weighinginput)

REAL 0 I Q +

PV_OUT DOSE: CURRENT VALUE REAL 0 O E +

Q 1=DOSING DEVICE ON BOOL 0 O

Q_SP_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR MAYENTER SETPOINT

BOOL 0 O +

QAK_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEFOR "ACKNOWLEDGE"

BOOL 0 O +

QCN_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "CANCEL"

BOOL 0 O +

QEND_DOS 1=END OF DOSING BOOL 1 O +

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O +


1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +


BOOL 0 O +


QP_OFF_EN STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "CONTINUE"

BOOL 0 O +

QP_ON_EN STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "PAUSE"

BOOL 0 O +

QPD_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEFOR "POSTDOSE"

BOOL 0 O +

QRELXING 1=RELAX TIME ACTIVE BOOL 0 O +

QSP_HLM 1=SETPOINT OUTPUT HIGHLIMIT ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QSP_LLM 1=SETPOINT OUTPUT LOWLIMIT ACTIVE

BOOL 0 O

QSPEXTEN STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "EXTERNAL"

BOOL 0 O +


BOOL 0 O +

QSPINTEN STATUS: 1=OPERATORENABLED FOR "INTERNAL"

BOOL 0 O +

QSTRT_OP STATUS: 1=OPERATOR ENABLEFOR "DOSE START"

BOOL 0 O +

QSTRTDOS STATUS: 1=DOSING STARTED BOOL 0 O +

QTOL_N STATUS: 1=AFTER DOSE ENDUNDERDOSED

BOOL 0 O +

QTOL_P STATUS: 1=AFTER DOSE ENDOVERDOSED

BOOL 0 O +

RELAXTME RELAX TIME AFTER DOSESTOP[S]

REAL 3 I +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





REVERSE 0=GAIN IN WEIGHT, 1=LOSS INWEIGHT

BOOL 0 I +


BYTE 3 I

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [S] REAL 1 I >0


SP_HLM SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT REAL 100 I +

SP_LLM SETPOINT LOW LIMIT REAL 0 I +

SP_OP OPERATOR INPUT SETPOINT REAL 0 IO B +

SP_OP_ON ENABLE 1=OPERATOR FORSETPOINT INPUT

BOOL 1 I Q

SPBUMPON ENABLE 1=BUMPLESS FORSETPOINT ON

BOOL 0 I +

SPEXON_L LINKABLE INPUT TO SELECTSP_EXT

Interconnectable input for selectingSP_EXT (0= Internal, 1= External)

BOOL 0 I Q

SPEXT_EN ENABLE:1=OPERATOR FOR"EXTERNAL" SETPOINTSOURCE SELECTION

BOOL 1 I Q

SPEXT_ON SETPOINT SOURCE 1=LINKING ,0=OPERATOR

1= Interconnection, i.e. SP_EXT isactive;0= Operator control is active

BOOL 0 I Q +

SPEXTSEL_OP

OPERATOR INPUT TO SELECTSP_EXT

BOOL 0 IO B +

SPINT_EN ENABLE:1=OPERATOR FOR"INTERNAL" SETPOINT SOURCESELECTION

BOOL 1 I Q

ST_OP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR MAYINPUT DOSE START

BOOL 0 I Q

START_OP 1=DOSE START AT POSITIVEEDGE

BOOL 0 IO B +


STNDSTLL FEEDBACK FROM DOSEDEVICE:1=STANDSTILL

BOOL 1 I Q +

TOL_N LOWER TOLERANCE BAND REAL 0 I +

TOL_P UPPER TOLERANCE BAND REAL 0 I +


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.7.3 Operator control and monitoring of DOSE







HL=SetpointLL=)

5

6

5

6

SP_OP

SP_HLM

SP_OP

SP_LLM

Setpoint

SP high limit

Setpoint

SP low limit


PV_IN

StatusdosingWaiting time(relaxing)end

(QSTRTDOS)

(QRELXING)

(QEND_DOS)

Command

(selection list:continue/pause) 5 PAUSE_OP =0/1 Continue/ Pause

Setpoint


HL=SetpointLL=)

5

6

5

6

SP_OP

SP_HLM

SP_OP

SP_LLM

Setpoint

SP high limit

Setpoint

SP low limit

Process variable PV_IN

(unit setpoint/processvariable)

(S7_shortcut ofSP_OP)

deviation EXT

dribbling DRIBB_F

unit (S7_shortcut ofSP_OP)

Start 5 START_OP =1 Dose start

cancel 5 CANCEL_OP =1 Cancel

postdose 5 POSTDOSE =1 Postdose

(symbol bell)


QMSG_SUP

MSG_LOCK


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001







(selection list: internal/external) 6

QSPEXTON

SPEXTSEL_OP =0/1 Internal/External

Limit violationupper QTOL_Plower QTOL_Nacknowledge 5 ACK_TOL_OP =1 Acknowledge

CustomizeSetpoint bumpless 6 SPBUMPON =0/1 SP bumpless off/onCorrection 6 DRIB_COR =0/1 Dribbling correction

off/onNew component 6 COMP_CHG =0/1 Component change

off/ondownward 6 REVERSE =0/1 Reverse=

No/Yes




Parameter Tolerance bandUpper limit(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=T.HLLL=)

6

6

6

TOL_P

(no check)

TOL_P

TOL_N

Upper tol. band

Upper tol. band

Lower tol. bandLower limit(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=T.LLLL=)

6

6

6

TOL_N

TOL_P

TOL_N

(no check)

Lower tol. band

Upper tol. band

Lower tol. band

CoastingDefault(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=InitLL=)

6

6

6

DRIBB

DRIBBMAX

DRIBB

(no check)

Dribbling init.

Max. dribbling

Dribbling init.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






Maximum(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=MaxLL=)

6

6

DRIBBMAX

(no check)

DRIBBMAX

0,0

Max. dribbling

Max. dribbling

Unit initial/maximum) (S7_shortcut ofSP_OP)

Time (s)Post-dosing 6 PDOS_TME Postdose timeWaiting time(relaxing)

6 RELAXTME Relax time

CorrectionFactor (%) DCF





(upper bar value) MO_PVHR(lower bar value) MO_PVLR(upper setpoint) SP_HLM(lower setpoint) SP_LLM

SetpointHL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Setpoint HLLL=)

6

6

6

SP_HLM

(no check)

SP_HLM

SP_LLM

SP high limit

SP high limit

SP low limitLL(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Setpoint LLLL=)

6

6

6

SP_LLM

SP_HLM

SP_LLM

(no check)

SP low limit

SP high limit

SP low limit

(unit HL/LL) (S7_shortcut ofSP_OP)

SignalingOverdos. 6 M_SUP_2 =0/1 Suppr over=

No/YesDos.ok 6 M_SUP_1 =0/1 Suppr normal=

No/Yes

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






Underdos. 6 M_SUP_3 =0/1 Suppr under=

No/Yes

BarUpper limit(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Bar HLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_PVHR

(no check)

MO_PVHR

MO_PVLRLower limit(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Bar LLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_PVLR

MO_PVHR

MO_PVLR

(no check)






21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.8 ELAP_CNT: Operating hours counter

5.8.1 Description of ELAP_CNT


FB 64

Calling OBs


Function

The block is used to measure the operating hours of units.

Operating principle

The block detects the time as long as the input ON_OFF=1, meaning that theconnected device is operating. The value SAMPLE_T[s]/3600 is added to the valueHOURS at every execution. The output HOURS thus specifies the number ofoperating hours.

Setting the counter

Under certain circumstances (for example, after maintenance or replacement of thedevice), the start value of the operating hour counter has to be specified (as a rule0). OS operator input of the HOURS_OP input is used to specify the tracking valueand then passed to the HOURS output by operating the TRACK_OP input or byinterconnecting the TRACK input to the HOURS output.

Error handling

Arithmetic error are indicated by ENO=0 or QERR=1.


No special measures. After start-up messages will be suppressed for the numberof cycles configured in the value RUNUPCYC.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Time response

The block only functions well in a watchdog interrupt OB. In order to ensure correcttime detection it should be installed (in CFC) in the same runtime block as thecontrol block of the monitored device.


The EPLAP_CNT block uses the ALARM8_P block to generate messages.

Messages are triggered by:

• The limit monitoring functions for the operating hours

• Messages regarding limit infringements can be suppressed individually via thecorresponding M_SUP_xx inputs. The process messages (not process controlmessages!) can be completely blocked with MSG_LOCK.



Message No. Block parameter Default message text Message class Can be suppressed by

1 QH_ALM ALARM HIGH M M_SUP_AH, MSG_LOCK

2 QH_WRN WARNING HIGH M M_SUP_WH, MSG_LOCK

All the auxiliary process values (AUX_PRx) of the message block can be assignedfreely.



1 AUX_PR01

2 AUX_PR02

3 AUX_PR03

4 AUX_PR04

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.8.2 Connections of ELAP_CNT


Meaning Data type Initial I/O Attr. OC&M


HOURS PERIOD OF DUTY (HOURS) REAL 0 O +

HOURS_AH HH ALARM LIMIT (HOURS) REAL 100 I +

HOURS_OP PRESET VALUE (HOURS) REAL 0 IO B +

HOURS_WH H ALARM LIMIT (WARNING) (HOURS) REAL 95 I +

M_SUP_AH 1=SUPPRESS HH ALARM BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_WH 1=SUPPRESS H ALARM (WARNING) BOOL 0 I +

MO_HOUHR HIGH LIMIT BAR RANGE

Upper display limit

REAL 120 I +

MO_HOULR LOW LIMIT BAR RANGE

Lower display limit

REAL 0 I +


MSG_EVID MESSAGE ID

ALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD 0 O +

MSG_LOCK ENABLE 1=MESSAGES LOCKED

1 = Process-state-specific messagesuppression

BOOL 0 I Q +


ON_OFF DEVICE STATUS 1=ON, 0= OFF BOOL 0 I Q +

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QH_ALM 1=HH-ALARM ACTIVE BOOL 0 O

QH_WRN 1=H ALARM ACTIV (WARNING) BOOL 0 O


1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +

QMSG_SUP 1=MESSAGE SUPPRESSION ACTIVE BOOL 0 O +

RUNUPCYC LAG: NUMBER OF RUN UP CYCLES BYTE 3 I

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [S] REAL 1 I

TRACK MODE: 1=TRACKING ON

Interconnectable input for TRACK

BOOL 0 I Q

TRACK_OP 1=TAKE OVER PRESET VALUE

1= Set HOURS to H_TRACK

BOOL 0 IO B +


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.8.3 Operator control and monitoring via ELAP_CNT





Default h (as a bar) HOURS

(bar at right)(red= upper alarmvalue)

HOURS_AH


HOURS_WH

Process variableshours HOURSState

on/offON_OFF

(symbol bell)


QMSG_SUP

MSG_LOCK




Maintenance DefaultPreset value = 5 HOURS_OP Preset valuereset 5 TRACK_OP =1 0 / Preset




Limits (red bar = alarm)(upper value) HOURS_AH

(yellow bar = warning)(upper value) HOURS_WH

AlarmAlarmactive

6

6

HOURS_AH

M_SUP_AH =0/1

HH alarm

Suppress HH=

No/YesWarningactive

6

6

HOURS_WH

M_SUP_WH =0/1

H alarm

Suppress H= No/Yes

Bar

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






High limit(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Bar HLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_HOUHR

(no check)

MO_HOUHR

MO_HOULRLow limit(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Bar LLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_HOULR

MO_HOUHR

MO_HOULR

(no check)

5.9 INTERLOK: Interlocking display

5.9.1 Description of INTERLOK


FB 75

Calling OBs

In the same OB with and after the last block whose signals are to be displayed onthe INTERLOK.

Function

The INTERLOK block is used to realize a standardized interlock display which canbe called on the OS. A maximum of 10 input signals which can each be negated asrequired can be assigned to the block.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle

The first 5 input I1_1 to I1_5 form a group. Every signal can be interconnecteddirectly or invertedly by setting the corresponding inputs NEG1_1 to NEG1_5.The type of logic operation of the first group is set by means of AND_OR1. Theresult can be inverted (NEGRES_1).The same applies for the second group of 5 inputs as for the first one.The two group results can be operated on logically by means of AND/OR.

The input OVERWRITE=1 can be used to set the output Q to 0 when an interlockis active (Q=1). This is only possible if OVERW_EN=1. The input is setOVERWRITE=0 if OVERW_EN=0 or if no interlock condition is fulfilled.Q_OVERWR=1 is displayed at the output to show that the output Q wasoverwritten.

Applies only if the input CHECK_EN = TRUE:

The output parameter FIRST_I contains the number (1 to 10) of the Input Ix whichwas first TRUE or inverted FALSE. If several conditions are set simultaneously, thelowest number is entered in FIRST_I. If the edge of the input RESET is positive,FIRST_I is set equal to zero, if none of the above conditions are fulfilled. Normallythe output Q is interconnected to RESET.

Error handling

Only by means of the operating system.


No special measures.

Time response

The block does not have a time response.


Does not exist.


Does not exist

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.9.2 Connections of INTERLOK


Meaning Datatype

Initial I/O Attr. OC&M

AND_OR1 1=AND, 0=OR FIRST GROUP BOOL 0 I Q +

AND_OR2 1=AND, 0=OR SECOND GROUP BOOL 0 I Q +

AND_OR3 1=AND, 0=OR SECOND LEVEL BOOL 0 I Q +

CHECK_EN 1=FIRST_I CHECK ENABLE BOOL 0 I Q +

FIRST_I FIRST INPUT IS TRUE (INVERTED FALSE) BOOL 0 O +

I1_1 INPUT 1 FIRST GROUP BOOL 0 I Q +





I2_1 INPUT 1 SECOND GROUP BOOL 0 I Q +





NEG1_1 1=I1_1 WILL BE INVERTED BOOL 0 I Q +










NEGRES_1 1=RESULT FIRST GROUP WILL BE INVERTED BOOL 0 I Q +

NEGRES_2 1=RESULT SECOND GROUP WILL BEINVERTED

BOOL 0 I Q +

OVERW_EN 1=OVERWRITE ENABLED BOOL 0 I Q +

OVERWRITE

1=OVERWRITE BOOL 0 IO Q +

Q OUTPUT BOOL 0 O +

Q_OVERWR 1=Q OVERWRITTEN BOOL 0 O +

Q1 OUTPUT FIRST GROUP BOOL 0 O +

Q2 OUTPUT SECOND GROUP BOOL 0 O +

RESET POSITIVE EDGE =RESET FIRST_I BOOL 0 I Q +


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.9.3 Operator control and monitoring of INTERLOK

The table shows the assignment of the parameters of the AS block to theinput/output fields of the faceplate.




Default (Logic plan)

(output field) in_1 I1_1 0 / in_1

in_2 I1_2 0 / in_2

in_3 I1_3 0 / in_3

in_4 I1_4 0 / in_4

in_5 I1_5 0 / in_5

in_6 I2_1 0 / in_6

in_7 I2_2 0 / in_7

in_8 I2_3 0 / in_8

in_9 I2_4 0 / in_9

in_10 I2_5 0 / in_10

Maintenance Overwrite

Enable OVERW_EN

active 5 OVERWRITE=0/1 Overwrite=Off/On

5.10 INT_P: Integration

5.10.1 Description of INT_P


FB 40

Calling OBs


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Function

Forms the time integral of the connected input value:

VTI

Udt= ∗∫1

Operating principle

The structure of INT_P is shown in the figure.

The block functions by means of sum generation in accordance with the trapezoidrule per sampling interval (SAMPLE_T). The result, Vinternal, lies within the rangeV_HL - hyst to V_LL + hyst (refer to the figure). Subsequently the value is written tothe output V after an additional limitation to between V_LL and V_HL.

t

V_HL

V_LL

V

U=1 if t>0U=0 if t<0

Input jump {

V_HL + hyst

V_HL - hyst

TI

U

hyst = HYS/100x(V_HL-V_LL)

V intern

V

Jump response of the INT_P

In addition the internal result Vinternal is monitored for violation of the limits V_LLand V_HL and displayed via the Boolean outputs QVLL and QVHL (refer to thefigure).

Error handling

Apart from the errors recognized by the operating system the following incorrectconfigurations are indicated by the block algorithm by ENO=0 and QERR=1:

• V_LL ≥ V_HL (V := 0)

• SAMPLE_T ≤ 0 (calculation is continued internally with the substitute value =1)

• TI ≤ 0 (calculation is continued internally with the substitute value = 1)

• Hysteresis HYS ≤ 0 (calculation is continued internally with the substitute value= 1)

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



t

t

QVHL 1

t

QVLL1

V_HL

V_LL

V intern

0

V_HL+hyst

V_LL-hyst

Limit monitoring of the INT_P


During the startup the internal historical process data as well as the output V arereset. The block must therefore additionally be called from the start-up OB(OB100).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Time response

The block must be installed in a watchdog interrupt OB.

EN

TI

HOLD

0

U

ENO

V

#

&TRACK

VTRACK

QVHL

QVLL

Error handlingQERR

I

#

V_HL

V_LL

HYS hyst=HYSx(VHL-

100

VHL+hys

VLL-Vintern

INT_P

INT_P structure

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.10.2 Connections of INT_P


Meaning Datatype


HOLD 1=HOLD INTEGRATION(priority before TRACK)

BOOL 0 I Q

HYS HYSTERESIS OF INTEGRALVALUE (V_INTERN) IN %

REAL 1 I Q ≥ 0


QVHL 1=HIGH LIMIT OF V ACTIVE1=V_INTERN ≥ V_HL

BOOL 0 O

QVLL 1=LOW LIMIT OF V ACTIVE1=V_INTERN ≥ V_LL

BOOL 0 O

SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [S] REAL 1 I > 0

TI RESET TIME [S] REAL 1 I Q ≥ 0

TRACK MODE: 1=TRACKING ON BOOL 0 I Q



V_HL HIGH LIMIT OUTPUT VALUE REAL 100 I Q V_HL > V_LL

V_LL LOW LIMIT OUTPUT VALUE REAL 0 I Q V_LL < V_HL

VTRACK TRACKING VALUE REAL 0 I Q


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.11 LIMITS_P: Limiter

5.11.1 Description of LIMITS_P


FB 41

Calling OBs

The OB in which the block is installed.

Function

Limitation of an analog value to a range which can be set.

Operating principle

The block passes the analog input value U to the output V as long as it lies withinthe set limits.

• If the value drops below the limit, the lower limit value is output. If the valueexceeds the limit, the upper limit is output.

• The active limitation is indicated by setting binary outputs. The naming of ahysteresis can be used in order to avoid wobbling of the display when the inputvalue fluctuates around the limit.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



U

U

U

V

QVLL

QVHL

VLL VHL

VHL

VLL

1

1

0

0HYST

HYST

Operating principle of the LIMITS_P

Error handling

• If V_HL - V_LL ≤ HYS, QVHL and QVLL can be 1 simultaneously.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.11.2 Connections of LIMITS_P



HYS HYSTERESIS OF INTEGRAL VALUE IN % REAL 0.0 I Q


QVHL 1=V > V_HL

Upper limit triggered

BOOL 0 O

QVLL 1=V < V_LL

Lower limit triggered

BOOL 0 O

U INPUT VALUE REAL 0.0 I Q

V ANALOG OUTPUT REAL 0.0 O

V_HL HIGH LIMIT OUTPUT VALUE REAL 100.0 I Q

V_LL LOW LIMIT OUTPUT VALUE REAL 0.0 I Q


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.12 MEANTM_P: Mean time value

5.12.1 Description of MEANTM_P


FB 42

Calling OBs

The watchdog interrupt OB into which the block is installed (for example, OB32). Inaddition in OB 100 (see start-up characteristics).

Function

The blocks is used to form a mean time value of an analog input signals across aconfigurable past time period in accordance with the equation:

Vn = ( U1 + U2 +...+Un) / n

where U1...Un are the detected values used for averaging.

Operating principle

During every execution of the block the arithmetic mean value is calculated fromthe current input value U and the values saved during the time T_WINDOW. This isthen updated at the output V. The current input value then overwrites the oldesthistorical process data.

• The time window across which averaging is to be carried out is entered in theparameter T_WINDOW.

• The block determines the number n of values to be saved from the integer partof the quotient T_WINDOW / SAMPLE_T.

• The block can save a maximum of 20 historical process values internally. Adata reduction is carried out in case of a longer time window.

• The STOP_RES input can be used:

- To stop the calculation process with "1". The output value remainsunchanged for the period.

- To reset the mean time value by a falling edge 1→0.

• If SAMPLE_T or T_WINDOW is changed, the mean time value is reset.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Error handling



Does not exist.

• If the block was active before the CPU stop, and continues to calculateafterwards, the CPU out-time relative to T_WINDOW has to be taken intoconsideration. This allows you to decide whether the result can still be used orwhether the calculation process has to be reset via the input STOP_RES.

Time response

The block must be called from a watchdog interrupt OB.

5.12.2 Connections of MEANTM_P


Meaning Datatype

Initial I/O Attr. OC&M Validvalues


SAMPLE_T SAMPLE TIME [S] REAL 1.0 I >0

STOP_RES STOP/RESET OF MEAN-VALUEGENERATION

BOOL 0 I Q

T_WINDOW SIZE OF TIME WINDOW [S] REAL 20 I




21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.13 MUL4_P: Multiplication of a maximum of 4 values

5.13.1 Description of MUL4_P


FC 262

Calling OBs


Function

The block multiplies up to 4 values

V := U1∗...∗Un (n≤4)

depending on the instancing (refer to the following table).Use the instancing with the lowest number of inputs possible in order to reduce thecalculation time.

Instancing I/O No. Meaning

MUL4_P FC 262 Multiplier with 4 inputs

Error handling


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.13.2 Connections of MUL4_P


Meaning Datatype


U1 INPUT 1 REAL I Q

.... .... .... .... .... ....

U4 INPUT 4 REAL I Q

V ANALOG OUTPUT REAL O


5.14 MUL8_P: Multiplication of a maximum of 8 values

5.14.1 Description of MUL8_P


FC 263

Calling OBs


Function

The block multiplies up to 8 values

V := U1∗U2∗U3∗...∗Un (n≤8)

depending on the instancing (refer to the following table).Use the instancing with the lowest number of inputs possible in order to reduce thecalculation time.

Instancing Meaning I/O No.

MUL8_P Multiplier with 8 inputs FC 263

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Error handling


5.14.2 Connections of MUL8_P



U1 INPUT 1 REAL I Q

.... .... .... .... ....

U8 INPUT 8 REAL I Q

V ANALOG OUTPUT REAL O


5.15 OB1_TIME: Determining the degree of CPU utilization

5.15.1 Description of OB1_TIME


FB 69

Calling OBs

OB1

Function

The OB1_TIME block allows the degree of utilization of the CPU to be determined.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle

The block is installed in OB1.

• The block is reset (CNT, MAX, MIN, MEAN and the internal ACT_TME arerest) and started by means of the falling edge (1->0) of input STOP_RES. Inthe process the current system time is determined and saved internally underL_TME.

• During every processing the block determines the system time of day in ms,saves it internally in ACT_TIME and calculates the maximum value since thereset time (MAX), the root-mean-square value (MEAN) and the minimum value(MIN) of the time which has passed since the last processing(OB_1_TIME=ACT_TIME-L_TIME). Afterwards the counter CNT isincremented by 1 and L_TIME=ACT_TIME is reset. The root-mean-squarevalue is calculated as follows:

MEANCNT

CNT MEAN OB TIME=+

+11

12 2( * _ )

• The calculated values are to be interpreted (setup personnel) in order to derivethe degree of CPU utilization of it.

• A 1 at the input STOP_RES causes the block algorithm not to be processedfurther (processing is "halted). ENO is reset during this time to 0 .


Does not exist.

Error handling



Does not exist.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.15.2 Connections of OB1_TIME



CNT COUNTER OUTPUT: CURRENT VALUE DINT 0 O

MAX MAXIMUM TIME DINT 0 O

MAX_CNT HIGH LIMIT VALUE COUNTER DINT 10000 I

MEAN QUADRATIC MEAN

Root-mean-square value

DINT 0 O

MIN MINIMUM TIME DINT 0 O

OB1_TIME CYCLE EXECUTION TIME

ACT_TIME - L_TIME

DINT 0 O

QERR 1=ERROR

Inverted value of ENO

BOOL 1 O

STOP_MAX MODE: 1=STOP AT CNT=MAX_CNT BOOL 0 I Q

STOP_RES STOP/RESET 1= STOP, 0=RESET BOOL 1 I Q


5.16 POLYG_P: Polygon with a maximum of 8 time slices

5.16.1 Description of POLYG_P


FC 271

Calling OBs


Function

An input U is converted to the output V in accordance with a non-linearcharacteristic curve with a maximum of 8 time slices.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle

After the N time slices have been specified (pairs of coordinates Ui,Vi with i = 1...Nin continuous sequence) and the configuration of the number N has been carriedout, the block operates as follows:

• The value is interpolated linearly between the time slices.

• Extrapolation is carried out on the basis of the first two or the last two timeslices outside the end time slice.

VN

V3

V2

V1

VN-1

U1 U2 U3 UN-1 UN U

V

U1 < U2 < ... < UN

Characteristic curve representation

Error handling

ENO=0 as well as V=U are output when:

• Number of time slices N < 2 or N > 8

• Ui > Ui+1 for i=1,2...N-1

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.16.2 Connections of POLYG_P



N NUMBER

Number of time slices

INT 0 I 2 ≤ N ≤ 8


U1 INPUT 1

U value of time slice 1

REAL 0.0 I Q

U2 INPUT 2


REAL 0.0 I Q

... ... ... ... ... ...

U8 INPUT 8


REAL 0.0 I Q

V1 INTERPOLATION POINT V 1 REAL 0.0 I Q


... ... ... ... ... ...




21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.17 PT1_P: First-order time-delay

5.17.1 Description of PT1_P


FB 51

Calling OBs

The OB into which the block is installed (for example OB32).

Function

The block operates in accordance with the equation:

V = U ∗ (1 - exp(-t/TM_LAG))

Operating principle

The input signal U is passed to the output V in accordance with the time constantTM_LAG.

The STOP_RES input can be used:

• To stop the calculation process with "1". The output value remains unchangedfor the period.

• To reset the output (V=U) by a falling edge 1→0.

V

tTM_LAGU=1 if t>0U=0 if t<0

{

0

1

0.63

Jump response of the PTI_P

Error handling


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.17.2 Connections of PT1_P


Meaning Data type Initial I/O Attr. Valid values



STOP_RES STOP/RESET OF PT1 FUNCTION BOOL 0 I Q

TM_LAG LAG TIME CONSTANT [S] REAL 0.0 I




21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.18 RAMP_P: Ramp generation

5.18.1 Description of RAMP_P


FB 52

Calling OBs


Function

Limitation of the ramp of an analog signal

Operating principle

The block calculates the ramp of the input signal dU/dt and compares it with thetwo limits URLM for positive changes or DRLM for negative changes (also refer tothe table).

• If the ramp (as a quantity) exceeds the respective maximum ramp (URLM orDRLM), the output V is only changed by the permitted rate and thecorresponding limitation display QLIM_U or QLIM_D is set.

• If the ramp lies within the valid range, the input value is passed through (U=V)and the values QLIM_U and QLIM_D are reset.

• If the input RATE_OFF=1, the ramp generation is de-activated, so that V=U,and QLIM_U = QLIM_D = 0.

RATE_OFF dU/dt Meaning Output V QLIM_D QLIM_U

0 < - DRLM Input value drops too rapidly V-(DRLM /SAMPLE_T)

1 0

0 - DRLM to URLM Rate of change is permissible U 0 0

0 > URLM Input value U rises too rapidly V+(URLM /SAMPLE_T)

0 1

1 Without meaning Ramp de-activated U 0 0

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Error handling

If SAMPLE_T<0, ENO=0 or QERR=1 is output.


During the startup the output V is reset. The block must therefore additionally becalled from the start-up OB (OB100).

Time response

The block must be called from a watchdog interrupt OB.

5.18.2 Connections of RAMP_P


Meaning Datatype

Initial I/O Attr. Validvalues

DRLM MAX. NEGATIVE RAMP RATE OF OUTPUTVALUE

REAL 3.0 I Q DRLM<URLM

QERR 1= ERROR BOOL 1 O

QLIM_D 1 = POSITIVE RAMP RATE LIMIT ACTIVE

Negative gradient too large

BOOL 0 O

QLIM_U 1 = NEGATIVE RAMP RATE LIMIT ACTIVE

Positive gradient too large

BOOL 0 O

RATE_OFF 1=RAMP RATE MONITORING OFF BOOL 0 I Q


U INPUT VALUE

Analog input (measured value)

REAL 0.0 I Q

URLM POSITIVE RAMP RATE LIMIT OUTPUTVALUE

REAL 3.0 I Q URLM>DRLM



21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.19 SPLITR_P: Split Range

5.19.1 Description of SPLITR_P


FC 272

Calling OBs

The OB in which the controller block runs whose manipulated variable isprocessed.

Function

Together with a controller block the block is used to implement a split-rangecontrol.

Operating principle

The block is installed in the run sequence after the controller block. The controlleroutput of the controller block is interconnected to the input U of the SPLITR_Pblock. The neutral position and the dead band zone is set by means of thecorresponding parameters. V1 and V2 are adapted to the physical dimension bymeans of the configuration of the upper / lower limits of V1 and V2. The transfercharacteristics have the following appearance:

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



V2HRANGE

V1HRANGE

V2LRANGE

V1LRANGE

UHRANGEULRANGE

NEUT_POS

DEADB_W

V2

V1U

U

QV2U

U

QV1

1

1

0

0

DEADB_W

Transfer characteristics of the SPLITR_P

Error handling

ENO=0 is output at the following errors:

• Incorrect calculation of V1 (whereby V1=V1LRANGE also applies)

• Incorrect calculation of V2 (whereby V2=V2LRANGE also applies)

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.19.2 Connections of SPLITR_P


Meaning Data type Initial I/O Attr. Valid values

DEADB_W DEADBAND WIDTH REAL 10.0 I

NEUT_POS NEUTRAL POSITION REAL 50.0 I > ULRANGE< UHRANGE

QV1 STATUS: 1=OUTPUT 1 ACTIVE BOOL 0 O

QV2 STATUS: 1=OUTPUT 2 ACTIVE BOOL 0 O


UHRANGE INPUT RANGE HIGH VALUE REAL 100.0 I Q > ULRANGE

ULRANGE INPUT RANGE LOW VALUE REAL 0.0 I Q < UHRANGE

V1 OUTPUT VALUE 1 REAL 0.0 O

V1HRANGE INPUT RANGE HIGH VALUE CH.1 REAL 100.0 I Q > V1LRANGE

V1LRANGE INPUT RANGE LOW VALUE CH. 1 REAL 0.0 I Q <V1HRANGE

V2 OUTPUT VALUE 2 REAL 0.0 O

V2HRANGE INPUT RANGE HIGH VALUE CH. 2 REAL 100.0 I Q > V2LRANGE

V2LRANGE INPUT RANGE LOW VALUE CH. 2 REAL 0.0 I Q < V2HRANGE


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



5.20 SWIT_CNT: Switching operation counter

5.20.1 Description of SWIT_CNT


FB 71

Calling OBs

In the same OB with and after the block which supplies the switching signals.Additionally in OB100 (see start-up characteristics).

Function

The block is used to count the number of switching operations of a device.

Operating principle

The block counts the switching operations at a positive edge (0->1) at the inputON_OFF and outputs the result at the output V. The maximum value is limited to 2to the power of 31 switching operations by the data type DINT.

Tracking

The counter output V can be tracked to the value VTRACK_OP by operatingTRACK_OP via OS or by interconnecting TRACK. VTRACK_OP can, in turn, beoperator controlled.

Monitoring the limits

The inputs VWH and VAH are used to configure a warning and alarm limit each.When they are exceeded a signal (QH_WRN or QH_ALM) and possibly a message(refer to message characteristics) are generated by the counter value V.

Error handling

The error output QERR is set for one cycle at a counter overflow of V and a controlsystem message is sent. Counter is then continued with 0.Operator errors are displayed at output QOP_ERR.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




No special measures. After start-up messages will be suppressed for the numberof cycles configured in the value RUNUPCYC.

Time response

The block must be executed in the same runtime group (for CFC planning) as thecontrol block of the device to be monitored. It must recognize the edges reliably.


The SWIT_CNT block uses the ALARM8_P block to generate messages.


• The limit monitoring functions for the switching operations





1 QAH ALARM HIGH M M_SUP_AH,MSG_LOCK

2 QWH WARNING HIGH M M_SUP_WH,MSG_LOCK

All the auxiliary process values (AUX_PRx) of the message block can be assignedfreely.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001





1 AUX_PR01

2 AUX_PR02

3 AUX_PR03

4 AUX_PR04

5 AUX_PR05

6 AUX_PR06

7 AUX_PR07

8 AUX_PR08

9 AUX_PR09

10 AUX_PR10


Does not exist

5.20.2 Connections of SWIT_CNT


Meaning Datatype



M_SUP_AH 1=SUPPRESS HH ALARM BOOL 0 I +

M_SUP_WH 1=SUPPRESS H ALARM (WARNING) BOOL 0 I +

MO_VHR HIGH LIMIT BAR RANGE

Upper display limit

REAL 120 I +

MO_VLR LOW LIMIT BAR RANGE

Lower display limit

REAL 0 I +

MSG_ACK MESSAGE ACKNOWLEGED WORD 0 O

MSG_EVID MESSAGE ID

ALARM8_P Event ID

DWORD

0 O +

MSG_LOCK ENABLE 1=MESSAGES LOCKED BOOL 0 I Q +


ON_OFF DEVICE STATUS 1=ON, 0= OFF BOOL 0 I Q +

QERR 1=ERROR

(inverted ENO)

BOOL 1 O +

QH_ALM 1=HH-ALARM ACTIVE BOOL 0 O

QH_WRN 1=H ALARM ACTIVE (WARNING)/ BOOL 0 O


1: ALARM8_P error

BOOL 0 O +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


QMSG_SUP 1=MESSAGE SUPPRESSION ACTIVE BOOL 0 O +

RUNUPCYC LAG: NUMBER OF RUN UP CYCLES INT 3 I

TRACK MODE: 1=TRACKING ON

Interconnectable input for TRACK

BOOL 0 I Q

TRACK_OP 1=TAKE OVER PRESET VALUE

1= Track V to V_TRACK

BOOL 0 IO B +

V NUMBER OF SWITCHES DINT 0 O +

VAH HH ALARM LIMIT DINT 100 I +

VTRACK_OP

PRESET VALUE

Tracking value

DINT 0 IO B + ≥ 0

VWH H ALARM LIMIT (WARNING) DINT 95 I +


5.20.3 Operator control and monitoring via SWIT_CNT





Default S (as a bar) V

(bar at right)

(red= upper warningvalue)

VAH


VWH

Switching operations

Number V

State

on/off ON_OFF


Maintenance Default

Preset value =

reset

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






Limits (yellow bar = warning)(upper value) VAH

(red bar = alarm)(upper value) VWH

AlarmAlarmactive

6

6

VAH

M_SUP_AH =0/1

HH alarm

Suppress HH= No/YesWarningactive

6

6

VWH

M_SUP_WH =0/1

H alarm

Suppress H=

No/Yes

BarHigh limit(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Bar HLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_VHR

(no check)

MO_VHR

MO_VLRLow limit(in thecorresponding inputdialog box:

HL=Bar LLLL=)

6

6

6

MO_VLR

MO_VHR

MO_VLR

(no check)

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001


6 Conversion blocks

6.1 General information on the conversion blocks

Purpose of conversion blocks

In CFC it is only possible to connect block outputs (source type) with inputs (targettype) if both data types are identical (for example, REAL output with REAL input).Conversion blocks must be used in order to interconnect different data types.These have inputs and outputs of different types and convert the input value to thedata type of the output. The conversion blocks required for interconnection arealready part of the ELEMENTA CFC block library. The only addition is theR_TO_DW block with a property added for process-engineering applications.

Calling OBs

The conversion block must be installed in the OB before the block which uses theconversion result.

6.2 Description of R_TO_DW


FC 282

Function

A REAL number is converted to a double word (DW). The value is accepted incase of a REAL number between 0 and 4294967000.

Error handling

If the values lie outside the limits, ENO = 0 and is limited downwards (= 0) orupwards (=4294967000).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Conversion blocks


6.3 Connections of R_TO_DW


Meaning Data type Initial I/O

U VALUE TO CONVERT REAL 0.0 I

V CONVERTED VALUE DWORD 0 O

23.08.200123.08.2001


7 Operator control blocks

7.1 Overview of the operator control blocks

This chapter introduces the operator control blocks. It explains how they can beused to operate block parameters.

Purpose of operator control blocks

An operator control block serves as the operating interface between blocks of thePLC and of the OS. It offers you the standard solution for problems of the followingtype:

How can the input parameter "W" of the function block "FB_yyy" be operated bythe plant operator and also be modified by the PLC program?

The theoretical solution is shown in the figure by the operator control block OP_xxwith its two parts OP_AS and OP_OS.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Operator control blocks


OS block AS blockCS

LINK_ON

LINK_x

X

Xok

#

X

OP_AS

FB_yyy

Y

OP_OS

X

External value / AS block

Switch external/internal

OS data storage

?

FB_yyy.W=Xok

OP_EN_x QOP_ERR

Operation concept

Operation concept

The operator control block must be used at two points simultaneously (refer to thefigure):

• In the PLC (PLC blocks abbreviated as OP_AS)

• In the OS (OS block abbreviated as OP_OS)

The valid value which is supplied by the OP_AS to the output Xok can originatefrom two different sources:

• Externally, supplied by another AS block (via the LINK_x input),

• Internally, via operator control via the OS block OP_OS.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



The general operating process is as follows:

• The OP_OS selected at the OS samples the values of the OP_AS or theenable/blocking of the operator controllability. Through its display the plantoperator is kept up to date on the state of the OP_AS. The display is carriedout asynchronously to the OP_AS in an OS-specific execution cycle.

• The plant operator operates/changes an operator-controllable element of theOP_OS. Its algorithm checks the input for validity:

- If the input is invalid (block-specifically), it is corrected or rejecteddepending on the respective case. The operator is informed.

- The corrected or the valid value is sent to the OP_AS and logged at theOS end.

• The OP_AS accepts the value and checks it for validity (it may be possible thatthere is a different state in the PLC now than at the time of operation of theOP_OS).

If the input is now invalid (block-specifically), it is corrected or rejected dependingon the respective case. The OP_AS indicates this through the Boolean outputQOP_ERR by means of a pulse having the duration of the sampling time of theOP_AS.

• The corrected or the valid value or - in case of rejection - the old value is madeavailable at the Xok output of the OP_AS corresponding to the operation forfurther use.

Overview

The table shows an overview of the operator control blocks. These are realized asFBs and require one instance DB each for each application.

Blockname

Meaning Operatingmethod

FB-No.

OP_A Analog value operation 45

OP_A_LIM Analog value operation Limiting 46

OP_A_RJC Analog value operation Rejecting 47

OP_D Digital value operation 2 pushbuttons 48

OP_D3 Digital value operation 3 pushbuttons 49

OP_TRIG Digital value operation pushbutton function 50

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



General connections

The operator control blocks (refer to the figure) have exactly specified connections,for the binary-value and for the analog-value operation. They have inputs andoutputs whose meaning is the same for all the operator control blocks as well assuch which only occur at operator control blocks for analog values (specified inbrackets in the figure).

The function of these inputs and outputs is described briefly.

Inputs

• EN is used to activate/de-activate the block algorithm.

- EN=1: The block is called from the OB in which it is installed.

- EN=0: The block call is skipped in the OB.

• X (representative designation for the operator-controllable input) is written asan IO type by the OS, sampled by the PLC block and overwritten, ifappropriate. This input is interacting. It may not be interconnected.

• X_HL and X_LL are the upper or lower operating limits for X (only at analogvalue operation). Operating values which violate these limits are limited orrejected, depending on the type of the operator control block.

EN

X

(X_HL)

LINK_x

LINK_ON

OP_ENx

(BTRACK)

QERR

Xok

QOP_ERR

(QxHL)

(QxLL)

QOP_ENx

(X_LL)

Algorithm

OperatingValues

Mode

Enable

Error handling

OP_XX

ENO

Structure of the operator control block (general)

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



• LINK_x is interconnected with an external value. This offers the externalalternative to the input X supplied internally (by operator control) (also refer toLINK_ON).

• LINK_ON changes over the mode which selects the value to be processed:

- LINK_ON=1: The value of input LINK_x - usually obtained byinterconnection to another block - is treated as an external valuespecification.

- LINK_ON=0: The value of input X - usually entered by OS operation - istreated as an internal value specification (from its own OP_XX).

• BTRACK (if it exists) is used for bumpless changing over during thechangeover from LINK_ON=1 to 0.

- BTRACK=1: While LINK_ON=1 the algorithm tracks the operator-controllable inputs X correspondingly to the LINK_x inputs. This operationensures that the block does not process old operating values of the Xinputs during the changeover to manual operation (LINK_ON=0) and thuschange the output active values.

- BTRACK=0: While LINK_ON=1 the operator-controllable inputs X are notoverwritten and thus as a rule remain different to the LINK_x value. Duringthe changeover LINK_ON=0 these old values become valid again and leadto corresponding changes of the output active Xok values (a so-calledbump).

• OP_EN_x is used as an enable/block for operator controllability of theassigned input X:

- OP_EN_x=1: The input X is enabled for operator controls.

- OP_EN_x=0: Operator control is blocked or is rejected.

Outputs

• ENO indicates the validity of the result Xok (1 = OK, 0 = invalid).

• QERR = Inverted ENO (is saved in the block instance).

• QOP_ERR indicates with a 1 after an operator control that this is a faultyoperator control. The output is reset again after one cycle (sampling time).

• Xok (representative designation for the effective active output). It contains theoutput value valid depending on the operator control block type and mode. It ismade available by interconnection to the PLC block whose input is to beoperated. Depending on the operator control block the concrete designation isthen called V, Q_1 etc.

• QxHL and QxLL are the indicators when the upper or lower operating limits forX are exceeded (only at analog value operation). Operating values whichviolate these limits are limited or rejected, depending on the type of theoperator control block.

• QOP_ENx is the output value passed on in accordance with the respectiveOP_ENx. It can be sampled by other PLC blocks as information on the currentoperator controllability of the OP_AS.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



7.2 OP_A: Analog value operation

7.2.1 Description of OP_A


FB 45

Calling OBs

The operator control block must be installed in the same OB with and before theblock which utilizes the operator control.

Function

Simple operator control block for an analog value of a PLC block without limitmonitoring and operator enable.

Operating principle


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



EN

U

LINK_ U

LINK_ON

BTRACK

V

#

&ENO

QOP_ERRError handling

OP_A

OP_A structure

• U is written by the OS operator control.

• LINK_U is supplied with an external value (configured or interconnected).

• LINK_ON switches the external/internal value:

- LINK_ON=1: LINK_U is passed through to V.

- LINK_ON=0: U is passed through to V.

• BTRACK allows tracking of the operator-controllable input U (only atLINK_ON=1).

- BTRACK=1: U is tracked to the value LINK_U. This ensures that a bumpdoes not occur at output V during the changeover to LINK_ON=0.

- BTRACK=0: U remains unchanged with the last (operated) value. After thechangeover to LINK_ON=0 is becomes active again.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Error handling

The following error displays are carried out:

• ENO=0 only from system side (no particular handling in the block)

• QOP_ERR=1 is set for one cycle, if an operation of the input U is carried outduring an active external value (LINK_ON=1). The input U retains its old value(before the operator control).

Error displays of the OP_A

ENO QOP_ERR Cause, if applicable reaction

0 X Errors recognized by the system (no particular handling in the block)

1 1 ( Π ) Operator control illegal while LINK_ON=1. Input U remains unchanged.

Π: Pulse with sampling time duration X: Any value

Time response

Does not exist. Install the OP_A in the same OB and before the block whose inputis to be operator controlled.


Does not exist. If an incorrect operator control has to be signaled, the outputQOP_ERR can be interconnected to a message block (refer to the section onmessage blocks).

7.2.2 Connections of OP_A


Meaning Datatype

Initial I/O Attrib. OC&M

BTRACK BUMPLESS CHANGEOVER1=ON, 0=OFF

BOOL 1 I Q +

LINK_ON SELECT: 1 LINKING, 0=OPERATOR ACTIVE

0 = OPERATION CONTROL active1 = Interconnection active

BOOL 0 I Q +

LINK_U LINKABLE INPUT: U

Interconnectable input for U

REAL 0.0 I Q


U OPERATOR INPUT REAL 0.0 IO B +

V ANALOG OUTPUT REAL 0.0 O +


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



7.2.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_A





Default Output V

Setpoint

(unit setpoint/output)

5 U

(S7_unit of U)

U

TrackingBumpless 6 BTRACK =0/1 Bumpless off/on

7.3 OP_A_LIM: Analog value operation (limiting)

7.3.1 Description of OP_A_LIM


FB 46

Calling OBs


Function

The operator control block OP_A_LIM (operation analog limited) operates ananalog value of a block.An operator control outside the operating limits is limited to the limit value whichhas been exceeded. Instead of the operating value (U) an interconnected orconfigured value (LINK_U) can be checked (LINK_ON=1).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle


EN

U

LINK_ U

LINK_ON

BTRACKENO

V

QOP_ERR

#

&

U_HL

U_LL QVHL

QVLL

OP_EN

Error handling QOP_LIM

X

X

QOP_EN

OP_A_LIM

QERR

OP_A_LIM structure

• U is written by the OS operator control. The operator control is:

- Enabled with OP_EN=1,

- Locked with OP_EN=0.

• LINK_U is supplied with an external value (configured or interconnected).

• LINK_ON switches the external/internal value after its limitation to U_LL orU_HL:

- LINK_ON=1: Limited LINK_U is passed through to V.

- LINK_ON=0: Limited U is passed to V and written back to input U. Thismeans that the input U can be changed without operator control bychanging the operating limits.

• BTRACK allows tracking of the operator-controllable input U (only atLINK_ON=1)

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



- BTRACK=1: The operator input U is tracked to the limited value LINK_U.This ensures that a bump does not occur at output V during thechangeover to LINK_ON=0

- BTRACK=0: U remains unchanged with the last (operated) value. After thechangeover to LINK_ON=0 it is passed again to the output V.

Error handling


ENO QOP_ERR QOP_LIM Cause, if applicable reaction

0 X X Errors recognized by the system

1 1 ( Π ) 0 Operator control illegal while LINK_ON=1. Input U remainsunchanged.

1 1 ( Π ) 0 An input enabled during the OS operator control (OP_EN=1) has inthe meantime been locked in the PLC (OP_EN=0).

1 1 ( Π ) 1 ( Π ) Enabled operator control outside the limits. Input U is limited.


Error displays of the OP_A_LIM (limitations)

QVLL QVHL Cause

1 0 Input value < U_LL. (input value is U or LINK_U)

0 1 Input value > U_HL. (input value is U or LINK_U)

Time response

Does not exist. Install the OP_A_LIM in the same OB and before the block whoseinput is to be operator controlled.


Does not exist. If an incorrect operator control has to be signaled, the outputsQOP_ERR or QOP_LIM can be interconnected to a message block (refer to thesection on message blocks).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



7.3.2 Connections of OP_A_LIM


Meaning Data type Initial I/O Attrib. OC&M

BTRACK BUMPLESS CHANGEOVER 1=ON,0=OFF

BOOL 1 I Q +

LINK_ON SELECT: 1 LINKING, 0=OPERATORACTIVE

0 = Operation control active1 = Interconnection active

BOOL 0 I Q +



REAL 0.0 I Q

OP_EN ENABLE 1=OPERATOR MAY INPUT BOOL 1 I Q

QERR 1=ERROR BOOL 1 O +

QOP_EN STATUS: 1=OPERATOR MAY INPUT BOOL 0 O +


QOP_LIM 1=OPERATOR INPUT HAS BEENLIMITED

BOOL 0 O

QVHL 1=HIGH LIMIT OF V ACTIVE BOOL 0 O

QVLL 1=LOW LIMIT OF V ACTIVE BOOL 0 O


U_HL HIGH LIMIT U REAL 100.0 I Q +

U_LL LOW LIMIT U REAL 0.0 I Q +



7.3.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_A_LIM





Default Output V

Setpoint



HLSetpointLL=)

5

5

U

(S7_unit of U)

U_HL

U

U_LL

U

U


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



7.4 OP_A_RJC: Analog value operation (rejecting)

7.4.1 Description of OP_A_RJC


FB 47

Calling OBs


Function

The operator control block OP_A_RJC (operation analog rejected) operates ananalog value of a block.An operation outside the operating limits. Instead of the operating value (U) aninterconnected or configured value (LINK_U) can be checked (LINK_ON=1). In thiscase the block limits the value in accordance with OP_A_LIM.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle

The block operates in accordance with the following process (also refer to thefigure):

EN

U

LINK_ U

LINK_ON

BTRACKENO

V

QOP_ERR

#

&

U_HL

U_LL QVHL

QVLL

OP_EN

Fehlerbehandlung QOP_RJC

X

X

QOP_EN

OP_A_RJC

QERR

OP_A_RJC structure

• U is written by the OS operator control. The operator control is:

- Enabled with OP_EN=1,

- Locked with OP_EN=0.

• LINK_U is supplied by an external value (configured or interconnected).

• LINK_ON switches the external/internal value after its limitation to U_LL orU_HL:

- LINK_ON=1: Limited LINK_U value is passed through to V.

- LINK_ON=0: Old (limited) U value is passed to V and written back to inputU. This means that the input U can be changed without operator control bychanging the operating limits.

• BTRACK allows tracking of the operator-controllable input U (only atLINK_ON=1)

- BTRACK=1: The operator input U is tracked to the limited value LINK_U.This ensures that a bump does not occur at output V during thechangeover to LINK_ON=0.

- BTRACK=0: U remains unchanged with the last (operated) value. After thechangeover to LINK_ON=0 it is passed again to the output V.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Error handling


ENO QOP_ERR QOP_RJC Cause, if applicable reaction

0 X X Errors recognized by the system

1 1 ( Π ) 0 Operator control illegal while LINK_ON=1. Input U remainsunchanged.

1 1 ( Π ) 0 An input enabled during the OS operator control (OP_EN=1) has inthe meantime been locked in the PLC (OP_EN=0).

1 1 ( Π ) 1 ( Π ) Enabled operator control outside the limits. Operated value isrejected.


Error displays of the OP_A_RJC (limitation only at LINK_ON=1)

QVLL QVHL Cause

1 0 Input value < U_LL. (input value is LINK_U)

0 1 Input value > U_HL. (input value is LINK_U)

Time response

Does not exist. Install the OP_A_RJC in the same OB and before the block whoseinput is to be operator controlled.


Does not exist. If an incorrect operator control has to be signaled, the outputsQOP_ERR or QOP_RJC can be interconnected to a message block (refer to thesection on message blocks).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



7.4.2 Connections of OP_A_RJC



BTRACK BUMPLESS CHANGEOVER1=ON, 0=OFF

BOOL 1 I Q +

LINK_ON SELECT: 1 LINKING, 0=OPERATORACTIVE

0 = Operation control active1 = Interconnection active

BOOL 0 I Q +



REAL 0.0 I Q





QOP_RJC 1=OPERATOR INPUT HAS BEENLIMITED

BOOL 0 O

QVHL 1=HIGH LIMIT OF V ACTIVE BOOL 0 O

QVLL 1=LOW LIMIT OF V ACTIVE BOOL 0 O


U_HL HIGH LIMIT U REAL 100.0 I Q +

U_LL LOW LIMIT U REAL 0.0 I Q +



21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



7.4.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_A_RJC





Default Output V

Setpoint


(in the correspondinginput dialogbox:

HL=SetpointLL=)

5

5

U

(S7_unit of U)

U_HL

U

U_LL

U

U


7.5 OP_D: Digital value operation (2 pushbuttons)

7.5.1 Description of OP_D


FB 48

Calling OBs


Function

The operator control block OP_D is used to operate a digital value of a block bymeans of two-pushbutton operation. If the operated value is valid, it is output to theoutput Q.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle


EN

I0

LINK_ I

LINK_ON

BTRACK

Q0

#

&

#

ENO

QOP_ERR

OP_EN0

Error handling

QOP_EN0

OP_EN1 QOP_EN1

OP_D

OP_D structure

• I0 is written by the OS operator control. Two separate inputs are used forenabling:

- OP_EN0=1 for operation with "0",

- OP_EN1=1 for operation with "1",

• LINK_I is supplied with an external value (configured or interconnected).

• LINK_ON switches the external/internal value:

- LINK_ON=1: LINK_U is passed through to Q0,

- LINK_ON=0: Operated I0 value is passed on to Q0.

• BTRACK allows tracking of the operator-controllable input I0 (only atLINK_ON=1).

- BTRACK=1: The operator input I0 is tracked to LINK_I. This ensures that abump does not occur at output Q0 during the changeover to LINK_ON=0.

- BTRACK=0: I0 remains unchanged with the last (operated) value. After thechangeover to LINK_ON=0 it is passed again to the output Q0.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Error handling




1 1 ( Π ) Operator control was not enabled or was carried out during LINK_ON=1.Input I0 remains unchanged.


Time response

Does not exist. Install the OP_D in the same OB and before the block whose inputis to be operator controlled.



7.5.2 Connections of OP_D




BOOL 1 I Q +

I0 OPERATOR INPUT 0 BOOL 0 IO B +

LINK_I LINKABLE INPUT I

Interconnectable input for I

BOOL 0 I Q

LINK_ON SELECT:1= LINKING, 0= OPERATOR ACTIVE

0 = OPERATION CONTROL active1 = Interconnection active

BOOL 0 I Q +

OP_EN0 ENABLE 1=OPERATOR MAY INPUT 0 BOOL 1 I Q

OP_EN1 ENABLE 1=OPERATOR MAY INPUT 1 BOOL 1 I Q

Q0 BINARY OUTPUT BOOL 0 O +

QOP_EN0 STATUS: 1=OPERATOR MAY INPUT 0 BOOL 0 O +

QOP_EN1 STATUS: 1=OPERATOR MAY INPUT 1 BOOL 0 O +



21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



7.5.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_D





Default Output QO

Command

(selection list:Off/On 5 IO =0/1 Off/On


7.6 OP_D3: Digital value operation (3 pushbuttons)

7.6.1 Description of OP_D3


FB 49

Calling OBs


Function

The operator control block OP_D3 is used to carry out a one-of-three digital valueoperation. When one of the three operating inputs I1, I2 or I3 is operated, thecorresponding output is set to 1 and the other outputs are reset, in as far as theoperation is permissible.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Operating principle

The block operates in accordance with the process described below (also refer tothe figure). x=1..3 is used as the index for the respective three inputs/outputs:

• I1, I2 and I3 have values assigned simultaneously to them by the OS operationcontrol ("1" to the input to be activated and "0" to the other two). Threeseparate inputs are used for enabling/locking:

- OP_EN_Ix=1 : Enabling of the operator control for input Ix

- OP_EN_Ix=0 : Disabling of the operator control for input Ix

• LINK_Ix is supplied with one external value each (configured orinterconnected).

• LINK_ON switches the external/internal values:

- LINK_ON=1: LINK_Ix are processed and passed on to Qx.

- LINK_ON=0: Operator-controllable Ix inputs are processed and passed onto Qx.

• BTRACK allows tracking of the operator-controllable inputs Ix (only atLINK_ON=1).

- BTRACK=1: The operating inputs Ix are tracked to the LINK_Ix. Thisensures that a bump does not occur at the output Qx during thechangeover to LINK_ON=0.

- BTRACK=0: Ix remains unchanged with the last (operated) value. After thechangeover to LINK_ON=0 it is passed again to the output Qx.

• The selection logic takes over the three input values (Ix or LINK_Ix) in theirsequence x=1,2,3 and memorizes the highest index "x" of the input which hasa "1". The output Qx corresponding to this index is set ("1") and the other twooutputs Qx are reset ("0"). If all three inputs I1=I2=I3=0 , the outputs are notchanged.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



EN

I1

LINK_ I1

LINK_ON

BTRACK

Q1

#

&

#

ENO

QOP_ERR

OP_EN_I1

Error handling

QOP_EN1x=1..3

Input 1

I2

LINK_ I2

I3

LINK_ I3

Input 2

Input 3

Selection

Logic

1 of 3

Q2

Q3

X

X

XY

Y

Y

OP_EN_I2 QOP_EN2

OP_EN_I3 QOP_EN3

OP_D3

QERR

OP_D3 structure

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Error handling

The following causes lead to the display of an error:


0 X Errors recognized by the system

0 0 More than one input is set to "1" due to non-consistent external values viaLINK_Ix. The output of the highest set input is set (refer to the operatingprinciples, selection logic).

0 1 There are several inputs set to "1", due to the non-consistent operated valuesIx. The output of the highest set input is set (refer to the operating principles,selection logic). In addition the error handling changes the inputs Ix inaccordance with the rule: The input Ix with the highest index "x" remains set, theothers are reset".

Time response

Does not exist. Install the OP_D3 in the same OB and before the block whose inputis to be operator controlled.



7.6.2 Connections of OP_D3


Meaning Datatype



BOOL 1 I Q +

I1 OPERATOR INPUT SWITCH 1 BOOL 0 IO B +



LINK_I1 LINKABLE INPUT: SWITCH 1

Interconnectable input for I1

BOOL 0 I Q



BOOL 0 I Q



BOOL 0 I Q

LINK_ON SELECT: 1 LINKING,0=OPERATOR ACTIVE

0 = Operator control active1 = Interconnection active

BOOL 0 I Q +

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


OP_EN_I1 ENABLE SWITCH 1 BOOL 1 I Q



Q1 SWITCH 1

Binary output 1

BOOL 0 O +

Q2 SWITCH 2

Binary output 2

BOOL 0 O +

Q3 SWITCH 3

Binary output 3

BOOL 1 O +


QOP_EN1 STATUS: 1=ENABLE SWITCH 1 BOOL 0 O +





7.6.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_D3





Default Output Q1; Q2; Q3

Command

(selection list:switch 1switch 2switch 3)

5

5

5

I1 =1

I2 =0

I3 =0

Switch1

5

5

5

I1 =0

I2 =1

I3 =0

Switch2

5

5

5

I1 =0

I2 =0

I3 =1

Switch3


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



7.7 OP_TRIG: Digital value operation (1 pushbutton)

7.7.1 Description of OP_TRIG


FB 50

Calling OBs


Function

This operator control block is used to realize a one-pushbutton operation(comparable with a RESET pushbutton).

Operating principle


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



EN

I0

LINK_ IQ0

ENO

QOP_ERRError handling

OP_EN QOP_EN1

SIGNAL

>1

OP_TRIG

(no function)

OP_TRIG structure

• 1 is written to I0 via operator control, in as far as this is permitted by OP_EN=1.The output Q0 is set to 1 for one cycle (sampling time) and then reset. Theoperation input I0 is reset by the operator control block after processing.

• The interconnectable input (LINK_I) is redundant to the operation input. Whenits edge is positive, a 1 is written at the output Q0 for one cycle (sampling time)and then reset. LINK_I does not have any influence on the operation enableQOP_EN.

• The block has an interconnectable input (SIGNAL), which is displayed on theOS. It does not have any function and is only used for OD display. It isadvisable to interconnect the signal to be reset, since the output signal Q0 ofthe block which is set for one cycle does not make sense here.

Error handling


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



Error displays of the OP_TRIG



1 1 ( Π ) Operator control was not enabled. Input I0 becomes 0.


Time response

Does not exist. Install the OP_TRIG in the same OB and before the block whoseinput is to be operator controlled.



7.7.2 Connections of OP_TRIG


Meaning Datatype


I0 OPERATOR INPUT 0 BOOL 0 IO B +

LINK_I LINKABLE INPUT I

Interconnectable input of I0

BOOL 0 I Q


Q0 BINARY OUTPUT BOOL 0 O



SIGNAL FEEDBACK SIGNAL FOR DISPLAY ON OS BOOL 0 I Q +


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



7.7.3 Operator control and monitoring of OP_TRIG





Default Feedbackexists SIGNAL

Commandreset 5 IO = 1 Reset

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001


8 Message blocks

8.1 Overview of the message blocks

Purpose of message blocks

Events which lead to a change in a digital value or a state in the PLC possibly haveto be made available as information to the plant operator. Message blocks areused in the PLC so that the OS does not have to sample the PLC cyclically. Thesemonitor digital values for changes and signal the event to the OS (with additional,configurable information). The OS can, in turn, visualize this information, log itand/or archive it.The table shows an overview of the message blocks. They are realized as FBs.

Overview of the message blocks

FB-No. Type name Meaning Operation method

43 MESSAGE Generation of configurable messages SIMATIC Process Control - Standard

44 MSG_CSF Generation of control system messages SIMATIC Process Control - Standard

The MESSAGE figure shows the MESSAGE block diagram. The S7 blockALARM_8P is shown.The adaptation of the messages is described at the individual block under"Message characteristics".

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Message blocks


8.2 MESSAGE: Message block (configurable messages)

8.2.1 Description of MESSAGE


FB 43

Calling OBs

In addition to the OB (for example OB32) in which the events to be monitored arerecognized, the message block must also be installed with its instance in OB100(refer to the start-up characteristics).

Function

The MESSAGE message block is used to generate configurable messages. Itforms the interface between the block outputs whose changes are to be signaledand the S7 block ALARM_8P.

Operating principle

The block has inputs through which, on the one hand, the individual messages areassigned to the monitored signals and, on the other hand, these can beenabled/blocked in accordance with the process states.

• EN: EN=1 enables the block processing.

• I_1 to I_8: Monitored signals whose changes are to be monitored. Aconfigurable message text (24 characters) is assigned to each of these signals.The text can be adapted by configuration and then used further in the OSconfiguration.Each change in these inputs causes a message to be sent to the OS - in as faras it is not blocked.

• I_1ISCSF to I_8ISCSF: When configured with "1" the corresponding messageis identified as a control system message (CSF).

• MSG_LOCK: This allows the message of this block to be blocked inaccordance with the process. When a rising edge of the blocking signal occurs,all the active process messages (not control system messages) are reset andthus sent as gone to the OS.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Message blocks


• AUX_PR01 to AUX_PR10: These inputs can be interconnected with anyvalues of any data types. These values, also known as auxiliary processvalues, are limited to 16 characters and sent with the message to the OS. Thisallows the cause of the message to be described in more detail.

• The plant operator can block the messages of a measuring point at the OSend. This is sent from the OS to the corresponding message block. Thissignals the successful blocking (via its ALARM_8P). Then the message isentered as acknowledged and gone in the message tracking log in the OS.

• QMSG_SUP indicates the successful message suppression.

• MSG_STAT, QMSG_ERR and MSG_ACK are acknowledged by the OS.

Error handling

Error handling of the message block is limited to the error information of theALARM_8P (refer to the "System software for S7-300/400 - System and standardfunctions" manual).

For error messages of the MSG_STAT parameter refer to the on-line help for theALARM_8P, STAT parameter.


During the startup the message block suppresses all the messages (also controlsystem messages). The duration (number of cycles) of message suppression is setvia the RUNUPCYC parameter. During a restart an internal counter with this valueis loaded and then decremented during every operation. As long as this is not zero,no messages are generated.

Messages

Messages are generated via ALARM_8P (SFB35). All the blocks use the PMCcommunication channel. The ALARM_8P has 8 digital inputs and 10 auxiliaryprocess values. Every edge change of one or more digital inputs which isrecognized leads to a message, irrespective of a successful acknowledgment. Theauxiliary process values are assigned consistent to the message at the time of theedge evaluation. There is a common message number (MSG_ID) for all 8 signals.This is subdivided at the OS into 8 messages. The ES assigns the messagenumber automatically by calling the message server.

Message text

Each message of a block has a default message text with a maximum of 24characters and is assigned to an (internal or external) parameter of the block and acertain message class (refer to the table). The message texts and message classcan be changed during configuration. The block algorithm is not affected by achange in the message class.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Message blocks



Message No. Block parameter Default message text Message class

1 I1 TEXT 1 F

: : : :

8 I8 TEXT8 F

Message classes

The possible message classes and their meaning are listed in the table.

Message class Meaning

AH Alarm high (high high alarm)

WH Warning high (high alarm)

WL Warning low (low alarm)

AL Alarm low (low low alarm)

TH Tolerance high

TL Tolerance low

F PLC control system message (error)

S PLC control system message (fault)

S* OS control system message (fault)

M Preventive maintenance

PM Process message

- Operation message

OR Operator request

OM *1) Operation message

*1) If the block is used for operation messages, the inputs I_1, ... have to besupplied with pulses. Assignment of the static value 1 would lead to multiplemessages.

Auxiliary process values

The auxiliary process values can be assigned in differing numbers and sequenceto every message. The auxiliary process values not used by the block algorithmcan be interconnected freely as input parameters AUX_PRx at the block.

The following data types are allowed at auxiliary process values: BOOL, BYTE,WORD, DWORD, CHAR, INT, DINT, REAL and ARRAY OF BYTE

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Message blocks


8.2.2 Connections of MESSAGE


Meaning Datatype

Initial I/O Attrib.

AUX_PR01 AUXILIARY VALUE 1 *2) 0 I Q

.... ... ... ... ... ...

AUX_PR010 AUXILIARY VALUE 10 *2) 0 I Q

EV_ID EVENT ID

Message number ALARM_8P(is assigned by ES)

DWORD 0 I

I_1 *1) INPUT 1 BOOL 0 I Q

... ... ...

I_8 *1) INPUT 8 BOOL 0 I Q

I_1ISCSF I1 ALARM TYPE SELECT1=CSF, 0=PROCESS

BOOL 0 I

... ... ... ... ... ...

I_8ISCSF I8 ALARM TYPE SELECT1=CSF, 0=PROCESS

BOOL 0 I

MSG_ACK ALARM_8P: ACK_STATE-OUTPUT

ACK_STATE output of the ALARM_8P

WORD 0 O


BOOL 0 I Q

MSG_STAT ALARM_8P: STATUS OUTPUT WORD 0 O


QMSG_ERR ALARM_8P: ERROR OUTPUT BOOL 0 O

QMSG_SUP 1=MESSAGE SUPPRESSION ACTIVE BOOL 0 O

RUNUPCYC LAG: NUMBER OF RUN UP CYCLES INT 3 I

*1) A 24-character long message text, message class for the OS can be assigned to eachinput I_1 to I_8.

*2) The following data types are allowed at auxiliary process values: BOOL, BYTE, WORD,DWORD, CHAR, INT, DINT, REAL and ARRAY OF BYTE


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Message blocks


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001


9 Blocks for Batch Flexible

9.1 Overview of the batch blocks

Purpose of batch blocks

The units involved in the batch process are automated by using the PLC. This"basic automation" is created PLC-specifically by using CFC or SFC. Recipecontrol of the BATCH flexible software runs in the OS. Interface blocks are requiredso that the recipe control function can read/write access the basic automation data.Their task consists of moving unit-specific data of basic automation which aresaved in different blocks to the interface blocks known to the recipe controlfunction. This moving process is carried out with the PLC configuration means (forexample, CFC by interconnecting the corresponding parameters). The correlationsare shown in the figure, whereby the abbreviation AF stands for "Automationfunction" ("Agitator control" in the example).

Basic automation

Recipe generation is preceded by the specification of the unit structure (devicestructure) and the utilizable automation functions (AF) including the required datafor AF parameter masks (also called basic automation). These specifications arecarried out in the configuration phase of the plant by using standard ES means.Generation of the actual processing blocks of the automation functions (the recipe-independent basic automation) is carried out by the user by using the ES. Thefollowing BATCH flexible blocks form the interface for recipe-independent basicautomation:

• AF interface blocks AF_n

- Every processing block of an automation function has its own AF interfaceblock from which it reads the recipe parameters (setpoint values) and intowhich it writes process variables for visualization. The recipe parametersare entered by the recipe control function.

- Since the number of setpoint and process-variable parameters of anautomation function varies depending on the application, 4 types of AFinterface blocks are available:

- AF_6 (with 6 setpoint and process-variable values each)


- AF_16S (with 16 setpoint and process-variable values each)


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Blocks for Batch Flexible


• Transition interface blocks TRANS

- A transition interface block is unit-specific and 10 analog and binarytransition parameters each. Several instances can be configured

• Unit assignment block UNIT

- One occupation block is available per unit. The recipe control functioncoordinates the unit occupation via these blocks.

Basic automation with interface blocks

The figure shows the principle of access by the BATCH flexible software to thebasic automation. The basic automation (configuration of the plant) is carried outby measuring-and control and control-system specialists by using the standardmeans of ES. The interfaces for communication between the batch system andbasic automation must additionally be created during basic operation for recipeoperation by means of BATCH flexible. This interface consists of BATCH flexiblespecific block types which can be divided into 3 classes:

• UNIT as the information memory for unit occupation by the recipe controlfunction,

• AF_6/12/16S/24 as the interface between the recipe control function and theautomation function (AF) in the PLC,

• TRANS as the interface between the process and the recipe control function.

The recipe control and unit occupation functions lie in the OS. The recipe controlfunction loads a recipe parameter record from the OS to the AF interface blockAF_n. The outputs of this interface block are connected to the inputs of the AF(realized by AF with CFC), or the recipe parameters are read by an SFC from theoutputs and written to the inputs of the processing blocks (AF with SFC). The AF isthen executed autonomously and provides its feedbacks to the corresponding AFinterface block. OS monitors these parameters and ’wakes’ the recipe controlfunction as soon as the feedback parameter has changed. In the recipe controlfunction the state is visualized and further processing is carried out. The recipecontrol function forms the transition condition by which reading the relevantparameters of the TRANS interface block (in the PLC). If the transition condition isfulfilled, the next recipe parameter record is written to the corresponding AFinterface block. Since several batches can run in parallel, the units are managed bymeans of the UNIT block which lies in the PLC .

The following functions are realized by means of these blocks:

• UNIT interface block for unit occupation. A unit occupation/release is requiredbecause a unit may not be blocked for the complete duration of a recipe inorder to ensure optimum utilization and in case it is needed during the furtherrecipe course. This applies as a rule for constellations with template reactors.The UNIT block which is instanced and configured with CFC is used for unitoccupation. Thus the CFC also specifies into which PLC the UNIT blockinstance is to be loaded. In basic automation one UNIT with an instance name(recommendation <= 16 characters) is instanced per unit by means of CFC..Since several units can be automated with one PLC, several UNIT blockinstances also have to be configured and loaded per PLC. The planner entersthe unit designation (recommendation: Instance name of the UNIT block) in

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



the UNITNAME parameter. During the recipe execution the recipe controlfunction uses the block for unit occupation or the unit occupation list tovisualize the plant state.

• AF interface blocks. Since the number of recipe parameters per automationfunction varies depending on the application, four types of these AF interfaceblocks are realized. AF_6 (with 6 recipe parameters and 6 process values forprocess variable messages), AF_12 (with 12 recipe parameters and 12process values), AF_16S (with 16 recipe parameters and 16 process values)and AF_24 (with 24 recipe parameters and 24 process values).During basic automation instances of these 4 types are created with CFC anddownloaded to the PLC.During production the recipe control function writes and reads from theseinstances which must be regarded as representatives for the automationfunctions which they represent. The automation functions are configured withstandard ES means (SFC, CFC) during basic automation. The recipeparameters are written by the recipe control function to the AF_6/12/16S/24interface blocks (refer to the AF_n connections). This AF_ interface blockrepresents the ’distribution point’ in basic automation. There are 2 theoreticalpossibilities:

- The AF processing block is an SFC and this fetches the values from theAF_6/12/16S/24 interface block and writes them to the standard functionblocks. At the same time the SFC is responsible for the occupation of thestandard function blocks at shared resources (by entering the batch nameBA_NA, step number STEP_NO, current batch number BA_ID andoccupation OCCUPIED). This results in a dynamic assignment betweenthe AF interface block and the processing block.

- The standard function blocks are connected directly to the correspondingcells of the AF interface block (in the CFC). In this case an occupation isnot required (fetch principle). This results in a static assignment betweenthe AF interface block and the processing block.

• TRANS interface block. A TRANS interface block is used as the interfacebetween the recipe control function and the process. Since the number oftransition parameters per unit varies in accordance with the application, severalinstances of the TRANS type can be configured per unit with CFC. Half of themeach are analog or binary transition parameters. During basic automationinstances of this type are created with CFC and downloaded to the PLC. Therecipe control function reads current values from the process via this interfacein order to form transition conditions for the transitions from one AF to the nextone.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



9.2 AF_6: Automation function interface BATCH flexible

9.2.1 Description of AF_6


FB 31

Calling OBs

The block is installed in the same OB and before the block of the basic automationwhich is executed fastest and which obtains setpoints via the AF_6.

Function

The block is used as the interface for setpoints and process variables of theBATCH flexible software in the PLC. Depending on the instancing (refer to thetable below) it has connections for up to 6 setpoints and 6 process variables.


AF_6 FB 31 Connection for 6 setpoints and 6 process variables

Operating principle

It passes up to 6 setpoints of the recipe control functions coming from the OS tothe PLC-end automation function, as well as the 6 process values connected at thePLC end back to the recipe control function in the OS.

Use the instancing with the lowest number of inputs possible in order to reduce therequired memory.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



9.2.2 Connections of AF_n


Meaning Datatype


AF_BLOCK AF BLOCK NAME

Name of the processing block lying behindthe AF (for example controller designationat an AF.HEAT)

STRING[16]

" I Q +

AF_NAME AF TYPE NAME STRING[16]

" I Q

BA_EN BATCH ENABLE

Basic enabling for the utilization of the AFwithin a recipe. Blocking may, for example,be necessary while restructuring the plant.

BOOL 1 I +

IABORT ABORT REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 IO Q +

IHOLD STOP REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 IO Q +

IREADY READY REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 IO Q +

IRESET RESET REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 IO Q +

ISTART START REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 IO Q +

ITERM TERMINATE REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 IO Q +

MESSAGEn MESSAGEBLOCK n WORD 0 I Q

OCCUPIED OCCUPIED BY BATCH BOOL 0 I +

PV_n_m MESSAGE BLOCK n: PROCESS VALUE m REAL 1) 0.0 I Q +

QABORT 1=ABORT REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 O +

QBA_EN BATCH ENABLED BOOL 1 O +

QHOLD 1=STOP REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 O +

QOCCUPIED OCCUPIED BY BATCH BOOL 0 O +

QREADY 1=READY REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 O +

QRESET 1=RESET REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 O +

QSTART 1=START REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 O +

QTERM 1=TERMINATE REQUEST FROM BATCHCONTROL

BOOL 0 O +

RES_n RESERVE WORD 0 I Q

RP_n_H 2) HIGH LIMIT RECIPE PARAMETER n REAL 0.0 I Q

RP_n_L2) LOW LIMIT RECIPE PARAMETER n REAL 0.0 I Q

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001




Meaning Datatype


TRIGG_Mn TRIGGER FOR PROCESS VALUEREPORT n

BOOL 0 I Q

UBA_ID ACTIVE BATCH ID DWORD 0 I Q +

UBA_NA BATCH NAME STRING[16]

" I Q +

UNITNAME UNIT NAME STRING[16]

" I Q +

URP_n RECIPE PARAMETER n REAL 0.0 I Q +

USTAT_L FEEDBACK AF STATUS DWORD 0 I +

USTEP_NO STEP NUMBER IN RECIPE WORD 0 I Q +

VBA_ID ACTIVE BATCH ID DWORD 0 O

VBA_NA BATCH NAME STRING[16]

" O +

VRP_n RECIPE PARAMETER n REAL 0.0 O

VSTATUS FEEDBACK AF STATUS DWORD 0 O +

VSTEP_NO STEP NUMBER IN RECIPE WORD 0 O Q +

Deviations at AF_16S:

1) PV_1_1 ... PV_2_2: STRING[16]

2) RP1_H / _L ... RP_9_H / _L not applicable

3) URP1 .. URP8 and VRP1 .. VRP8: STRING[16]


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



9.2.3 Operator control and monitoring of AF_6





Batch Batch controlEnable 6 BA_EN =0/1 Disable batch/

Enable batchOccupied 6 OCCUPIED =0/1 Release/Occupy

BatchName VBA_NAStatus

undefined VSTATUS =1inactive =2active =4end =8hold =10abort =20finished =40

Step

Automatic

Group error

DeviceName UNITNAMEBlock AF_BLOCK

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






FB 32

Calling OBs


Function




Operating principle

It passes up to 12 setpoints of the recipe control functions coming from the OS tothe PLC-end automation function, as well as the 12 process values connected atthe PLC end back to the recipe control function in the OS.


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001












Step

Automatic

Group error


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



9.4 AF_16S: Automation function interface BATCH flexible

9.4.1 Description of AF_16S


FB 57

Calling OBs

The block is installed in the same OB and before the block of the basic automationwhich is executed fastest and which obtains setpoints via the AF_16S.

Function



AF_16S FB 57 Connection for 16 setpoints and 16 process variables

Operating principle



21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



9.4.2 Operator control and monitoring of AF_16S









Step

Automatic

Group error


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001






FB 33

Calling OBs


Function


Instancing Type No. Meaning


Operating principle



21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001












Step

Automatic

Group error


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



9.6 TRANS: Transition interface BATCH flexible

9.6.1 Description of TRANS


FB 55

Calling OBs

The block is installed in the same OB and after the last block of the basicautomation which is executed fastest and whose data are interconnected to theTRANS as transition conditions.

Function

The block is used as the interface for transition conditions of the BATCH flexiblesoftware in the PLC.

Operating principle

The block is interconnected to up to 10 Boolean and 10 analog transitionparameters each from basic automation. It makes these available to the recipecontrol of BATCH flexible.

9.6.2 Connections of TRANS


Meaning Data type Initial I/O Attr. OC&M

TP_1 TRANSITION PARAMETER 1 BOOL 0 I Q +

... ...

TP_10 TRANSITION PARAMETER 10 BOOL 0 I Q +

TP_11 TRANSITION PARAMETER 11 REAL 0 I Q +

... ...

TP_20 TRANSITION PARAMETER 20 REAL 0 I Q +

UNITNAME UNIT NAMEName of the unit to which the transitionblock is assigned.

STRING[16]

" I Q +


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



9.7 UNIT: Unit allocation interface BATCH flexible

9.7.1 Description of UNIT


FB 56

Calling OBs

The UNIT block must be installed in the same OB with and after the last TRANSblock of the basic automation of the unit to be occupied which runs slowest in thePLC.

Function

It is used as the batch control as the unit representative for its occupationmanagement. The unit (represented by a UNIT block) does not have to remainoccupied by the batch control for its entire duration. It can be made available for adifferent batch after its task within a batch has been terminated.

Operating principle

The block is used by the batch control in order to manage the occupation of theassigned unit.The algorithm of the UNIT block transfers the value from the input UBA_ID to theoutput VBA_ID only if UBA_ID=0 or VBA_ID=0. The values have the followingmeaning:UBA_IB=0 -> Enable unit,

VBA_ID=0 -> Unit is enabled,

UBA_ID>0 -> Assign the batch with number UBA_ID to the unit,

VBA_ID>0 -> The batch with number UBA_ID is assigned to the unit.The batch which wants to occupy the unit carries this out as follows:

• It begins monitoring of VBA_ID (active occupation),

• If VBA_ID=0 (the unit is free), the own batch number is entered in UBA_ID(occupation request).

• If VBA_ID=Own batch number, occupation was successful and monitoring ofVBA_ID can be terminated. During the first course the recipe/process data areread or written via the corresponding interface block TRANS and AF_n.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



• Otherwise the occupation has not become effective and monitoring of VBA_IDis continued.

• After unit occupation has been terminated, the batch control writes UBA_ID=0and thus releases the unit.

9.7.2 Connections of UNIT


Meaning Datatype


BA_EN BATCH ENABLE

Unit can be blocked/enabled by theplanner by using the ES(for example, while restructuring theplant)

BOOL 0 I +


" I Q +

UBA_ID ACTIVE BATCH ID

Current number of the batch,assigned internally

DWORD 0 I +

UNITNAME UNIT NAME STRING[16]

" I Q +

VBA_ID ACTIVE BATCH ID

Current number of the batch,assigned internally

DWORD 0 O +


21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



9.7.3 Operator control and monitoring via UNIT






Enable batchOccupied(selection list:release) 6

VBA_ID

UBA_ID =0/1 Release/Occupy

BatchName

DeviceName

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001



21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksA5E00127672-01 A-1

A Appendix

A.1 Technical data

The technical data apply for the PCS 7 Technological Blocks library.

The column headings have the following meaning:

Block type name

The symbolic identifier in the symbol table of the library for the respective FB orFC. FC It must be unique within the project.

FB/FC No.

Block number

Typical run time

The time which the CPU needs to process the corresponding block program undernormal circumstances (for example, for a driver this is the execution time in thewatchdog interrupt OB, without message generation in the event of channel errors).

The following table shows the block data for block in an CPU S7 414-2 DP6ES7414-2XG02-0AB0, and S7 416-2 DP 6ES7416-2XK01-0AB0. With otherCPUs the run time depends on their performance.

Block length

Memory requirements of the program code, once for every block type.

Instance data length

Memory requirement of an instance DB.

Temporary memory

The local-data memory required in a priority class when the block is called. This islimited CPU-specifically. When it is exceeded, a CPU STOP is caused. You haveto check it in the CPU configuration and, if necessary, distribute it amongst the(OBs) to meet the real requirements.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Appendix

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksA-2 A5E00127672-01

Multiple instance block

The specified blocks are used by the technological block and must exist in the userprogram. They can be found in the same library.

Block (typename)

FB/FCNo.

Typicalrun time(ms)CPU 414-2 DP

Typicalrun time(ms)CPU 416-2DP

Typicalrun time(ms)CPU 417-4R1.2.8

Blocklength(bytes)

Instancedatalength(bytes)

Tempo-rarymemory(bytes)

Multipleinstanceblock

ADD4_P FC256 0.014 0.011 122 - 2

ADD8_P FC257 0.021 0.017 202 - 2

AF_12 FB32 0.14 0.13 358 408 28

AF_16S FB57 1.16 1.084 1.094 764 28

AF_24 FB33 0.15 0.137 454 656 28

AF_6 FB31 0.14 0.13 310 284 28

AVER_P FB34 0.24 0.23 368 54 48

COUNT_P FB36 0.23 0.22 338 54 44

CTRL_PID FB61 0.88 0.80 5076 538 136 2xFB46 +SFB35

CTRL_S FB76 0.28 7524 576 192 2xFB46 +SFB35

DEADT_P FB37 0.24 0.23 702 126 48

DIF_P FB38 0.26 0.24 498 72 56

DIG_MON FB62 0.66 0.64 0.17 1190 304 56 SFB35

DOSE FB63 0.72 0.69 3578 404 76 FB46 +SFB35

ELAP_CNT FB64 0.52 0.51 926 304 48 SFB35

FMCS_PID FB114 1.40 1.28 6474 594 238 FB46 +SFB35

INT_P FB40 0.26 0.25 884 80 60

INTERLOK FB75 0.31 0.24 1034 46 46

LIMITS_P FB41 0.0208 0.0166 216 58 6

MEANTM_P FB42 0.132 0.106 1.294 154 20

MEAS_MON FB65 0.68 0.66 0.2 1404 310 56 SFB35

MESSAGE FB43 0.53 0.5 694 274 44 SFB35

MOT_REV FB67 0.71 0.68 0.2 3608 314 70 SFB35

MOT_SPED FB68 0.71 0.68 0.24 4334 314 66 SFB35

MOTOR FB66 0.69 0.66 0.2 1998 304 54 SFB35

MSG_CSF FB44 0.5 0.48 14768 3484 84 SFB34 +SFB35

MUL4_P FC262 0.016 0.013 122 -- 2

MUL8_P FC263 0.027 0.021 202 -- 2

OB1_TIME FB69 0.74 0.71 1802 70 84

OP_A FB45 0.013 0.012 156 56 2

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Appendix

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksA5E00127672-01 A-3

OP_A_LIM FB46 0.024 0.02 358 68 6

OP_A_RJC FB47 0.024 0.02 388 68 6

OP_D FB48 0.016 0.013 286 44 2

OP_D3 FB49 0.033 0.0265 1128 46 8

OP_TRIG FB50 0.014 0.011 166 44 2

POLYG_P FC271 0.09 0.07 1172 -- 24

PT1_P FB51 0.021 0.0168 338 66 2

R_TO_DW FC282 0.014 0.011 262 -- 10

RAMP_P FB52 0.24 0.23 516 64 54

RATIO_P FB70 0.05 0.04 486 122 12 FB46 +SFB35

SPLITR_P FC272 0.038 0.031 644 -- 10

SWIT_CNT FB71 0.53 0.51 1062 300 92 SFB35

TRANS FB55 -- -- 96 2

UNIT FB56 0.27 0.25 94 82 2

VAL_MOT FB74 0.71 0.68 0.30 3608 314 70 SFB35

VALVE FB73 0.68 0.66 0.28 2554 304 54 SFB35

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Appendix

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksA-4 A5E00127672-01

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksA5E00127672-01 Glossary-1

Glossary

A

Aspect

Attributes of a block with regard to its application in the AS (FB, FC), ES (display inthe library or in CFC, display for testing and commissioning purposes) and OS(texts for messages and operations, corresponding faceplate for visualization in theOS).

B

Block

Object of a library or of a block structure, divided into function blocks (executableon an automation system) and faceplates (display blocks) (executable on an OS).The block has aspects for AS, OS and ES which are described by properties. Bothblocks are configured with ES. The block type is contained in the library. ES isused to create an instance data block and to configure it further.

Block library

Software package which contains block types combined in accordance withcommon features. It is installed via ES.

Block header

Section of the block with management information on its assignment (for exampletype name, block name, etc.).

Block body

Section of the block with function-specific information (for example values at datablocks, program code at functions).

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Glossary

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksGlossary-2 A5E00127672-01

Block type

Object of a library which passes its properties to the respective instance data blockwhen it is used in a block structure. The block type (method, data maintenanceand aspect description) is stored in ES.

C

CS

Bus system for exchanging data between components.

Connections of R_TO_DW


Meaning Data type Initial I/O

U VALUE TO CONVERT REAL 0.0 I

V CONVERTED VALUE DWORD 0 O

D

Data block

This is used for storing data which are processed by programs or functions.

Display element

Object as a component of the faceplate which corresponds to a specific I/Oelement of a block type.

Driver block

Block which imports and exports automation-system values into or from themodule. It forms the software interface to the process, converts the physicalvalues into process values (and vice versa) and supplies additional information withregard to the availability of the hardware addressed.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Glossary


E

Enable input

Enable input, through which processing of a function block is enabled or disabled(only exists in CFC display mode).

Faceplate (display block)

Block which is executable in the OS and which is used to operate and monitor thecorresponding automation-system block. It is also supplied for certain block typesin the libraries. Also includes checking of the operated values.

F

Fetch principle

The value which is interconnected to an input of a block is only updated (fetched)by the method associated with the block of the interconnected input - and notearlier. If this block is not processed, the input will not have an updated value,despite its being interconnected.

Function

This term is defined in IEC 1131-3 as a software unit which when executed deliversa single result (which can also be a complex data type) and which does not havethe capability of saving data (memory).The essential difference between it and an FB is the lack of a data storagecapability (instance). The result of the FC call must therefore either be savedexplicitly by the user or it must be used immediately. The FC is representedsimilarly to the FB (with several inputs and one output) for the process controlsystem user programming with the ES - ensuring that handling is uniform.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Glossary


Function block

In accordance with the IEC TC65/WG6 draft standard of May 1995 this term isdefined as follows:

The function block (FB instance) is a functional software unit which consists of adesignated individual copy of the data structure defined by the function block type,with the data structure being retained from one call of the function block to the next.

The main features of the FB instance are as follows:

• Type and instance identifier

• Input and output events. These use algorithms of the OB in which the FBinstance is processed or are used by these algorithms.

• Input or output variables which are read or changed respectively by the FBalgorithm.

• Functional features which are defined by the type description and which aregenerally realized via the algorithm of the FB.

As a rule the algorithm of an FB is not visible from outside the FB – unless the FBmanufacturer describes it in any form.

Result: The user sees the FB through the data storage as an input/output bar withthe information: “What must exist at which input in order for the desired result to beobtained at the defined output?”. The FB manufacturer has dealt with the questionof how the result is obtained. The user can thus restrict himself to the technologicalaspects without having to deal with the programming details. Suitable means (ES)can be used to ensure that the FBs are handled graphically, in a clear structureand with additional ease.

I

Initial startup

From the point of view of the block the process in which the block is executed forthe first time after having been instanced. Afterwards the block is in a defined statewith regard to its parameters and operating modes.

Installation

Process by means of which a block (FB or FC) in an OB is logged in forprocessing. As a rule an existing processing sequence must be observed, which iswhy the term "install" is used instead of "insert" here.

Instance DB

Data block which results from a block type and which serves as the storage unit fora concrete application of this type. In a project, for example, the "control" block typeis represented by several instances (instance DBs) in order to be able to save therespective setpoint value, operating mode, parameters, etc. for each control task.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Glossary


L

Limit

Reference value for an analog variable which leads to a reaction when the value isreached or exceeded.

M

Message class

Classification of messages in accordance with their cause. The following messageclasses are used in the SIMATIC process control system:

• Process signals which are triggered when process-specific monitoring values(for example: alarms, interrupts, upper/lower tolerance, general processsignals) are reached or exceeded.

• Control system messages which are output by the control system (systemmessages), the I/O units (errors in the field) or for preventive maintenance.

• Requests for operator input which, in the case of certain operation sequences,draw the operator’s attention to the necessity of an operator intervention (forexample, request to acknowledge a stepping operation manually in order toenable transition) or operator input lists.

Table of possible message classes and their meaning

Message class Meaning

AH Alarm high (high high alarm)

WH Warning high (high alarm)

WL Warning low (low alarm)

AL Alarm low (low low alarm)

TH Tolerance high

TL Tolerance low

F Process error (field)

S Control system message (system)

S* OS control system message (fault)

M Preventive maintenance

PM Process message

- Operation message

OR Operator request

OM*1) Operation message

*1) If the block is used for operation messages, the inputs I_1, ... have to besupplied with pulses. Assignment of the static value 1 would lead to multiplemessages.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Glossary


Monitoring

Part of the tasks of an OS which allows visualization of the process parametersand states in various forms (numerical, graphical).

Multiple instance block

We speak of multiple instances in cases where additional function blocks are calledby one block using its own (meaning without an additional) instance DB.

Prerequisite is that the FBs to be called are registered as static variables in thevariable declaration of the FB to be called.

This ensures that a concentration of the instance data in one instance data block isreached, meaning that the number of DBs available can be used better.

O

Operator control

Process in which the plant operator induces changes in values or states at a block.As a rule these are initiated by entries at the OS, checked and transferred via theCS to the operator control block in the automation system. Because the workingprocess may have changed in the time between the OS sending and theautomation system receiving a final check is carried out here before it is assignedto the block.

Operator control block

Block which checks the plant operator intervention at the OS end and, if it ispermissible, makes it available in the automation system at the block inputinterconnected to it. At the same time it presents confirmation of the operation atthe OS end.

Operator control text

Text which is allocated to a block input and which is used for image display or forlogging the operations on the OS.

Operating mode

Characteristic of a block which marks a certain application-specific processingphase for various cases in the course of the block program.Thus, for example the MANUAL operating mode at a control block signifies theprogram sequence in which the controller algorithm is not executed and the outputvariable (manipulated variable) is stipulated manually by the operator.The operating mode is usually coded in the block. It is selected or displayed bymeans of an integer parameter or combinations of binary parameters.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Glossary


R

Redundancy

Multiple existence of components having the same tasks, which if required (forexample in case of errors or faults) can take over from each other.

S

Sampling time

Interval between two consecutive scans of a block in a temporally equidistantprocessing class (watchdog interrupt OB). It is defined by the ES on the basis ofthe configured runtime group.

Standard (block, display block)

Generic term for all objects in standard libraries which are supplied by Siemens.

Startup

From the point of view of the CPU the transition between the operating statusSTOP (internal STOP, i.e. CPU is ready) and operating status RUN (withprocessing of the user programs). The following types of startups can bedifferentiated on the basis of the organization blocks (CPU specific):

Cold restart, in which the results and states at interrupts are not taken intoconsideration (OB100).

Restart, in which the results and states of the user program at the interrupt areconsidered (not relevant for this library).


Transition of a block into a defined state after it has been processed in a start-upOB. In this library only a cold restart is relevant (OB100).

T

Tracking

Status, which can be activated, of a block during which a (tracked) parameter isoverwritten by its own program with the value of another parameter (trackingvalue). This means that a value defined by the user can be forced upon aparameter which is usually determined by a process or program.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Glossary


U

User (block, display block)

Generic term for all the objects supplied by the user (customer, engineering office,department planning a project for a customer) in user-specific libraries.

21.08.200123.08.200123.08.2001

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksA5E00127672-01 Index-1

Index

AActuating signal generation of CTRL_S .......3-28ADD4_P .........................................................5-1ADD8_P .........................................................5-2Addition for a maximum of 4 values ...............5-1Addition for a maximum of 8 values ...............5-2Addressing a control channel .......................3-72AF_12......................................................9-8, 9-9

Description .................................................9-8Operator control and monitoring.................9-9

AF_16S ...............................................9-10, 9-11Description ...............................................9-10Operator control and monitoring...............9-11

AF_24..................................................9-12, 9-13Description ...............................................9-12Operator control and monitoring...............9-13

AF_6...............................................................9-7Description .................................................9-4Operator control and monitoring.................9-7

AF_n...............................................................9-5Connections ...............................................9-5

Analog value operation...................................7-6Analog value operation (limiting) ....................7-9Analog value operation (rejecting)................7-13Automatic mode ...........................................3-75Automatic mode of CTRL_PID .......................3-6Automatic operation of CTRL_S...................3-30AVER_P ..................................................5-3, 5-5

Connections ...............................................5-5Description .................................................5-3

BBack-up mode of the FM355 ........................3-79Batch blocks...................................................9-1

Overview ....................................................9-1Block diagram of CTRL_PID ........................3-12Block diagram of CTRL_S............................3-39

CChanging operating modes in CTRL_S........3-33Changing operating modes of CTRL_PID ......3-7Channel error ...............................................3-77Connection of FM 355 ..................................3-70Connections of ADD4_P ...............................5-2Connections of OP_A_RJC.........................7-16Connections of VAL_MOT...........................4-32Connections of VALVE................................4-41Connections of ADD8_P ................................5-3

Connections of AF_n ..................................... 9-5Connections of AVER_P................................ 5-5Connections of COUNT_P............................. 5-7Connections of CTRL_PID........................... 3-14Connections of CTRL_S .............................. 3-42Connections of DEADT_P ............................. 5-9Connections of DIF_P.................................. 5-11Connections of DIG_MON ........................... 3-56Connections of DOSE.................................. 5-16Connections of ELAP_CNT ......................... 5-26Connections of FMCS_PID.......................... 3-79Connections of INT_P.................................. 5-35Connections of INTERLOK.......................... 5-30Connections of LIMITS_P............................ 5-38Connections of MEANTM_P........................ 5-40Connections of MEAS_MON ....................... 3-61Connections of MESSAGE ............................ 8-5Connections of MOT_REV............................. 4-6Connections of MOT_SPED ........................ 4-15Connections of MOTOR............................... 4-23Connections of MUL4_P.............................. 5-42Connections of MUL8_P.............................. 5-43Connections of OB1_TIME .......................... 5-45Connections of OP_A .................................... 7-8Connections of OP_A_LIM .......................... 7-12Connections of OP_D .................................. 7-19Connections of OP_D3 ................................ 7-23Connections of OP_TRIG ............................ 7-27Connections of POLYG_P ........................... 5-47Connections of PT1_P................................. 5-49Connections of RAMP_P ............................. 5-51Connections of RATIO_P............................. 3-66Connections of SPLITR_P........................... 5-54Connections of SWIT_CNT.......................... 5-57Connections of TRANS................................ 9-14Connections of UNIT ................................... 9-16Controller ....................................................... 3-1Controller block............................................ 3-70Conversion blocks ......................................... 6-1COUNT_P............................................... 5-5, 5-7

Connections............................................... 5-7Description................................................. 5-5

Counter.......................................................... 5-5Creation of the manipulated variable of

CTRL_PID ................................................. 3-5CTRL_PID ...................3-1, 3-5, 3-12, 3-14, 3-20

Block diagram .......................................... 3-12Changing operating modes........................ 3-7Connections............................................. 3-14Creation of the manipulated variable ......... 3-5Description................................................. 3-1Error handling .......................................... 3-10Manual

Index

Process Control System PCS 7, Technological BlocksIndex-2 A5E00127672-01

automatic and tracking mode................. 3-6Operator control and monitoring .............. 3-20Setpoint

limit and error signal formation:.............. 3-3CTRL_S ..................3-24, 3-26, 3-28, 3-30, 3-33,

................... 3-36, 3-37, 3-38, 3-39, 3-42, 3-48Actuating signal generation...................... 3-28Block diagram .......................................... 3-39Changing operating modes...................... 3-33Connections............................................. 3-42Description............................................... 3-24Error handling .......................................... 3-36Manual

automatic and tracking operation ......... 3-30Message characteristics .......................... 3-37Monitoring ................................................ 3-37Operator control and monitoring ..... 3-37, 3-48Signal processing..................................... 3-26Start-up characteristics ............................ 3-37Time characteristics ................................. 3-37

DData ............................................................. 3-76Dead time element......................................... 5-7DEADT_P ............................................... 5-7, 5-9

Connections............................................... 5-9Description................................................. 5-7

Description of AF_12 ..................................... 9-8Description of AF_16S................................. 9-10Description of AF_24 ................................... 9-12Description of AF_6 ....................................... 9-4Description of AVER_P.................................. 5-3Description of COUNT_P............................... 5-5Description of CTRL_PID............................... 3-1Description of CTRL_S ................................ 3-24Description of DEADT_P ............................... 5-7Description of DIF_P...................................... 5-9Description of DIG_MON ............................. 3-54Description of DOSE.................................... 5-11Description of ELAP_CNT ........................... 5-24Description of FMCS_PID............................ 3-70Description of INT_P.................................... 5-31Description of INTERLOK ............................ 5-28Description of LIMITS_P .............................. 5-36Description of MEANTM_P .......................... 5-39Description of MEAS_MON.......................... 3-59Description of MESSAGE .............................. 8-2Description of MOT_REV............................... 4-1Description of MOT_SPED .......................... 4-11Description of MOTOR................................. 4-19Description of MUL4_P ................................ 5-41Description of MUL8_P ................................ 5-42Description of OB1_TIME ............................ 5-43Description of OP_A ...................................... 7-6Description of OP_A_LIM .............................. 7-9Description of OP_A_RJC ........................... 7-13Description of OP_D .................................... 7-17Description of OP_D3 .................................. 7-20Description of OP_TRIG .............................. 7-25Description of POLYG_P ............................. 5-45

Description of PT1_P....................................5-48Description of R_TO_DW ...............................6-1Description of RAMP_P................................5-50Description of RATIO_P ...............................3-65Description of SPLITR_P..............................5-52Description of SWIT_CNT ............................5-55Description of TRANS ..................................9-14Description of UNIT ......................................9-15Description of VAL_MOT..............................4-27Description of VALVE...................................4-37Determining the degree of CPU utilization....5-43DIF_P ................................................... 5-9, 5-11

Connections .............................................5-11Description .................................................5-9

Differentiation .................................................5-9DIG_MON.................................. 3-55, 3-56, 3-58

Connections .............................................3-56Description ...............................................3-54Operator control and monitoring...............3-58

Digital value monitoring ................................3-54Digital value operation (1 pushbutton)..........7-25Digital value operation (2 pushbuttons) ........7-17Digital value operation (3 pushbuttons) ........7-20Display blocks ................................................2-1DOSE ....5-12, 5-14, 5-16, 5-17, 5-18, 5-19, 5-20


Dosing process.............................................5-13

EELAP_CNT......................................... 5-26, 5-27


Error .............................................................3-77Error during configuration .............................3-77Error handling...............................................3-77Error handling in CTRL_PID.........................3-10Error handling of CTRL_S ............................3-36Error signal generation .................................3-73

FFirst-order time-delay ...................................5-48FM 355 .........................................................3-79

Back-up mode ..........................................3-79FMCS_PID ....................... 3-70, 3-72, 3-79, 3-85

Connections .............................................3-79Description ...............................................3-70Function.......................................... 3-72, 3-73Operator control and monitoring...............3-85

Function of FMCS_PID.................................3-72

GGeneral information on the block description .1-1General information on the display blocks......2-1

Index


II/O access error............................................3-77INT_P ........................................ 5-32, 5-34, 5-35

Connections .............................................5-35Description ...............................................5-31

Integration ....................................................5-31Interlocking display.......................................5-28INTERLOK ................................ 5-28, 5-30, 5-31


LLimit generation............................................3-73Limiter ..........................................................5-36LIMITS_P ............................................5-36, 5-38


MManipulated variable generation ..................3-74Manipulated variable tracking.......................3-75Manual

automatic and tracking mode ...................3-75Manual mode ...............................................3-75Manual mode of CTRL_PID ...........................3-6Manual operation of CTRL_S.......................3-30Mean time value...........................................5-39MEANTM_P ........................................5-39, 5-40


MEAS_MON.............................. 3-60, 3-61, 3-63Connections .............................................3-61Description ...............................................3-59Operator control and monitoring...............3-63

Measured-value monitoring..........................3-59MESSAGE................................ 8-2, 8-3, 8-4, 8-5

Connections ...............................................8-5Description .................................................8-2

Message block (configurable messages) .......8-2Message blocks .............................................8-1

Overview ....................................................8-1Message characteristics of CTRL_PID.........3-10Message characteristics of FMCS_PID........3-77MOT_REV....................................... 4-4, 4-6, 4-9

Connections ...............................................4-6Description .................................................4-1Operator control and monitoring.................4-9

MOT_SPED............................... 4-14, 4-15, 4-18Connections .............................................4-15Description ...............................................4-11Operator control and monitoring...............4-18

MOTOR.................. 4-19, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23,.............................................. 4-24, 4-25, 4-26Connections .............................................4-23Description ...............................................4-19Operator control and monitoring...............4-26

Motor valve control ...................................... 4-27Motor with a control signal ........................... 4-19Motor with two speeds ................................. 4-11MUL4_P....................................................... 5-41

Description............................................... 5-41MUL8_P....................................................... 5-42

Description............................................... 5-42Multiplication of a maximum of 4 values ...... 5-41Multiplication of a maximum of 8 values ...... 5-42

OOB1_TIME.......................................... 5-43, 5-45

Connections............................................. 5-45Description............................................... 5-43

OP_A ...................................................... 7-8, 7-9Connections............................................... 7-8Description................................................. 7-6Operator control and monitoring ................ 7-9

OP_A_LIM ..........................7-9, 7-10, 7-11, 7-12Connections............................................. 7-12Description................................................. 7-9Operator control and monitoring .............. 7-12

OP_A_RJC ..............7-13, 7-14, 7-15, 7-16, 7-17Connections............................................. 7-16Description............................................... 7-13Operator control and monitoring .............. 7-17

OP_D................................7-17, 7-18, 7-19, 7-20Connections............................................. 7-19Description............................................... 7-17Operator control and monitoring .............. 7-20

OP_D3..............................7-20, 7-22, 7-23, 7-24Connections............................................. 7-23Description............................................... 7-20Operator control and monitoring .............. 7-24

OP_TRIG................................... 7-26, 7-27, 7-28Connections............................................. 7-27Description............................................... 7-25Operator control and monitoring .............. 7-28

Operating error ............................................ 3-77Operating hours counter .............................. 5-24Operating mode selection............................ 3-75Operating, monitoring and starting up

CTRL_S................................................... 3-37Operator control and monitaoring of

CTRL_S................................................... 3-48Operator control and monitoring of AF_12..... 9-9Operator control and monitoring

of AF_16S................................................ 9-11Operator control and monitoring of AF_24... 9-13Operator control and monitoring of AF_6....... 9-7Operator control and monitoring of

CTRL_PID ............................................... 3-20Operator control and monitoring

of DIG_MON ............................................ 3-58Operator control and monitoring

of DOSE................................................... 5-20Operator control and monitoring

of ELAP_CNT .......................................... 5-27Operator control and monitoring

of FMCS_PID........................................... 3-85

Index


Operator control and monitoringof INTERLOK........................................... 5-31

Operator control and monitoringof MEAS_MON ........................................ 3-63

Operator control and monitoringof MOT_REV.............................................. 4-9

Operator control and monitoringof MOT_SPED ......................................... 4-18

Operator control and monitoringof MOTOR................................................ 4-26

Operator control and monitoringof OP_A ............................................ 7-9, 7-17

Operator control and monitoringof OP_A_LIM ........................................... 7-12

Operator control and monitoring of OP_D.... 7-20Operator control and monitoring

of OP_D3 ................................................. 7-24Operator control and monitoring

of OP_TRIG ............................................. 7-28Operator control and monitoring

of RATIO_P.............................................. 3-68Operator control and monitoring

of SWIT_CNT........................................... 5-58Operator control and monitoring of UNIT ..... 9-17Operator control and monitoring

of VAL_MOT ............................................ 4-35Operator control and monitoring of VALVE.. 4-43Operator control blocks....................7-1, 7-3, 7-4

Overview.................................................... 7-3Overview of the batch blocks ......................... 9-1Overview of the message blocks ................... 8-1Overview of the operator control blocks......... 7-1

PParameters .................................................. 3-76

transferring............................................... 3-76PID controller .......................................... 3-1, 3-2PID controller block........................................ 3-1POLYG_P ........................................... 5-45, 5-47


Polygon with a maximum of 8 time slices .... 5-45PT1_P................................................. 5-48, 5-49


RR_TO_DW ..................................................... 6-1

Description................................................. 6-1Rack failure.................................................. 3-77Ramp generation ......................................... 5-50RAMP_P ............................................. 5-50, 5-51


RATIO_P....................................3-65, 3-66, 3-68Connections............................................. 3-66Description............................................... 3-65Operator control and monitoring .............. 3-68

ReadingData..........................................................3-76

Reading data from the module .....................3-76Reversing motor .............................................4-1

SSafety operation ...........................................3-76Setpoint generation ......................................3-73Setpoint tracking...........................................3-75Signal processing in the setpoint and

process-variable branches of CTRL_PID ...3-3Signal processing in the setpoint and

process-variable branches of CTRL_S.....3-26Split Range...................................................5-52SPLITR_P .......................................... 5-52, 5-54


Start-uptime and message characteristics

of CTRL_S............................................3-37Start-up characteristics of CTRL_PID...........3-10Start-up characteristics of FMCS_PID..........3-77SWIT_CNT................................ 5-56, 5-57, 5-58


Switching operation counter .........................5-55

TTechnical data ............................................... A-1Time average .................................................5-3Time characteristics of FMCS_PID...............3-77Time response of CTRL_PID .......................3-10Tracking mode..............................................3-75Tracking mode of CTRL_PID .........................3-6Tracking operation of CTRL_S .....................3-30TRANS .........................................................9-14


Transferring parameters to the module ........3-76Transition interface BATCH flexible..............9-14

UUNIT.......................................... 9-15, 9-16, 9-17


Index


VVAL_MOT......................... 4-30, 4-31, 4-32, 4-35


VALVE ............4-37, 4-38, 4-39, 4-40, 4-41, 4-43Connections............................................. 4-41Description............................................... 4-37Operator control and monitoring .............. 4-43

Valve control ................................................ 4-37

Index


process control system pcs 7, technological blocks · pdf filecontents process control system...

Documents